JP6681647B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning drum type gaming machine (also referred to as “pachi-slot machine” or “slot machine”).

  Conventionally, in a general slot machine, a game is started by a predetermined start operation after the game medals inserted from an insertion slot reaches a predetermined bet number, and, for example, a reel is rotated. After that, the reels that were rotating by the player's predetermined reel stop operation are stopped, the presence or absence of a prize is determined according to the combination of the symbols displayed when the reels are stopped, and a game in which a game medal is paid out is provided. It

  In such a conventional slot machine, the game medals inserted from the slot are guided to the game medal passage, and when a predetermined sensor (insertion sensor) provided in the game medal passage detects the game medal, A process of adding medals to the bet number of games (bet process) or a process of adding medals to the stored number (credit process) is performed. However, the bet process and the credit process are not always executable, and a state in which the bet process and the credit process can be performed (permitted state) and a state in which the bet process cannot be performed, for example, during reel rotation (non-permitted state) Therefore, it is necessary to return the game medals thrown in the unauthorized state.

  Therefore, in the above slot machines, generally, the game medal passage is divided into a permitted game medal passage and a non-permitted gaming medal passage, and the permitted position (ON state) is provided upstream of the branch point. A blocker displaceable between the non-permission position and the non-permission position (OFF state) is provided. More specifically, when the blocker is turned on in the permitted state, the game medal is guided to the game medal passage in the permitted state, and when the blocker is turned off in the non-permitted state, the game medal is not permitted. I will guide you to the game medal passage (return port).

  Here, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a slot machine that prevents "entrapment of a game medal" that entraps a game medal during transition of the blocker from the OFF state to the ON state. The slot machine of Patent Document 1 is provided with a passage sensor for detecting a game medal upstream of the blocker in the game medal passage, and when the blocker in the OFF state is turned on, the passage sensor detects the game medal. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the above, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, data for turning on the blocker is stored in the RWM (Read Write Memory). By doing so, it is possible to switch the blocker to the ON state after ensuring a sufficient grace time for the game medal detected by the passage sensor to pass through the blocker, and prevent the game medal from being caught by the blocker. it can.

JP, 2016-137055, A JP, 2002-052133, A

By the way, a conventional slot machine is provided with a main control means (main control board) for performing main control for controlling a game and a sub control means (sub control board) for performing sub-control for controlling effects, etc. The constituent processes include a main process that mainly executes a process based on the progress of the game, and a timer interrupt process that executes a series of processes by a periodic interrupt. An example of the timer interrupt process is a process of updating (subtracting or adding) the timer value of the timer. For example, in Patent Document 2, in the process of delaying the execution of the effect using the subtraction timer, the delay time obtained by the lottery is set in the subtraction timer, the elapsed time from the time of the lottery is measured, and the delay time is calculated. There is disclosed a slot machine that executes an effect when the passage of time is measured (that is, when the set value of the subtraction timer becomes zero).

However, Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not disclose a detailed timer value management method. Here, as conventionally known, in order to update (subtract in this case) the timer value, an "address designation instruction" that directly commands the address (timer address) where the timer value is stored to the register If it is necessary to write the address specification instruction for each timer in the program, it is expected that the program capacity will increase.

On the other hand, in the slot machine, since a predetermined upper limit value is set in the storage area of the ROM (Read Only Memory) mounted on the main control board, it is important to reduce the program capacity for main control. It However, as described above, the slot machine disclosed in Patent Document 2 has a problem that it is difficult to suppress an increase in the program capacity for main control related to timer interrupt processing when using a timer.

Therefore, in view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses an increase in the program capacity for main control .

In order to solve such a problem, the present invention has a first storage area capable of storing a 1-byte value and a second storage area capable of storing a 2-byte value, and when the first condition is satisfied. A 1-byte timer having a first storage area, a first value that can be stored in the first storage area, and a second value that can be stored in the second storage area when a second condition is satisfied. An area and a 2-byte timer area having a second storage area, the 1-byte timer area and the 2-byte timer area are configured to be adjacent to each other, and a value stored in at least the first storage area at a predetermined cycle. , And an update process capable of updating the value stored in the second storage area can be executed. In the update process, a first special subtraction instruction that is one instruction and a second special subtraction instruction that is one instruction. The special subtraction instruction can be executed and is stored in the first storage area. When updating the value is capable of executing a first special subtraction instruction, when updating the value stored in the second storage region is capable of executing a second special subtract instructions, the first storage The first special subtraction instruction can be executed without determining whether the value stored in the area is "0", and "N (where N is 1 or more)" is stored in the first storage area. In the stored state, the value of the first storage area becomes “N−1” when the first special subtraction instruction is executed, and in the situation where “0” is stored in the first storage area, the first Even if the special subtraction instruction of is executed, the value of the first storage area becomes "0", and the second special subtraction is performed without determining whether the value stored in the second storage area is "0". and executable instructions, in the second storage area "M (however, M is one or more values)" in a situation where is stored, the second When the special subtraction instruction is executed, the value of the second storage area becomes "M-1", and in the situation where "0" is stored in the second storage area, even if the second special subtraction instruction is executed, A game machine in which the value of the second storage area is “0” is provided.

According to the present invention, an increase in the program capacity for main control can be suppressed .

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. It is a front external view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a top view of part of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an outline of control in the slot machine according to the present embodiment. It is an external perspective view of a game medal selector. It is a schematic diagram of the blocker periphery arranged in a game medal selector. It is a figure for explaining an example of arrangement of a display and an operation switch. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete example of use of a digit. It is a figure which shows an example of the input ports 0-2. It is a figure which shows an example of the output ports 3-6. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the storage address (address) of the data memorize | stored in RWM, and its content. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the storage address (address) of the data memorize | stored in RWM, and its content. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the storage address (address) and the content of the data memorized by RWM. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the storage address (address) of data memorized by RWM, and its content. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the storage address (address) of the data memorized by RWM, and its content. It is a figure (the 6) which shows the storage address (address) of the data memorized by RWM, and its content. It is a figure for explaining the arrangement of the symbols of each reel. It is a diagram for explaining the display of the symbol when the reel is stopped. It is a figure (1) for explaining the combination of symbols. It is a figure (2) for explaining the combination of symbols. It is a figure (3) for explaining the combination of symbols. It is a figure (the 4) for explaining the combination of symbols. It is a figure (5) for explaining the combination of symbols. It is a figure (1) for explaining each role. It is a figure (2) for explaining each winning combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the role lottery table used by a role lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a program start (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process (M_RANK_SET). It is a flow chart which shows control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flow chart which shows control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET). It is a flow chart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows input port 0-2 read (SS_IN_READ). It is a flow chart which shows non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP). It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN). It is a flowchart showing a game start set (MS_GAME_SET). It is a flowchart showing a game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flow chart showing reading of the number of stored sheets (R_CREDIT_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flow chart which shows addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC). It is a flowchart showing a medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flow chart which shows medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows a care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows a care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows 1 addition of the number of stored sheets (MS_CREDIT_ADD). It is a flowchart showing a game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET). It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows 1 medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY). It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows payout of one medal (M_1MEDAL_PAY). It is a flow chart which shows subtraction of 1 sheet number of storage (M_CREDIT_DEC). It is a flowchart which shows a storage bet process (MS_BET_IN). It is a flowchart which shows a start switch check (M_START_CHK). It is a flow chart which shows start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL). It is a flowchart showing a medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows a timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). It is a flowchart which shows a selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK). It is a flow chart which shows power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a timer storage area. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st modification of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd modification of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT).

  An embodiment of the present invention will be described below by taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example.

[1. Meaning of term]
First, the meaning of the terms used in this specification will be described.

(Bet, specified number, storage)
“Betting” means betting a game medium (a game medal, a game ball, etc. (hereinafter, a game medal, etc.)) in order to play a game. In a management game machine (also referred to as an enclosed game machine, a medal-less game machine, etc.), electronic information is meant as a game medium for playing a game. In the present embodiment, a game medal is inserted from the insertion slot (corresponding to the game medal insertion slot 26 shown in FIG. 4) or a bet switch for betting the stored game medals (the bet switch 33 shown in FIG. 4). Is operated, and a game medal is bet. For the sake of simplicity, “(the game medals) are inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26” is described as “maintenance (abbreviation of insertion by hand)”.

  The “specified number” means the number of game media (game medals, etc.) that need to be bet in order to play one game (obtain the result of one game). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to "3". The specified number may be set to "1" or "2", or a plurality of specified numbers such as "2" or "3" may be set. Further, the specified number may be set to different values (eg, non-bonus game = 3 cards, bonus game = 2 cards) depending on the gaming state.

  "To store" means to store (credit) a game medium (game medal or the like). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the game media that can be stored is set to "50 (sheets)".

  For example, in a situation where no game medals have been bet, when four game medals are cared for, three (up to a specified number) of game medals are bet and the remaining one game medal. Is stored. That is, when a game medal is cared for, it may be bet or stored. Further, in a situation where 45 game medals are stored, when 9 game medals are paid out, 5 (up to 50 (upper limit)) game medals are stored, and the remaining 4 medals are stored. Game medals are paid out from the payout opening (corresponding to the payout opening 53 shown in FIG. 2). That is, when a game medal is paid out, it may be stored or may be paid out from a payout opening.

  In addition, “a player obtains a game medal (viewpoint from the player side)” is synonymous with “pay out a game medal (viewpoint from the slot machine 10 side)” to the player.

(RT)
“RT” means a lottery state of a winning combination (details of the winning combination will be described later). Further, “RT transition” means transition from one RT to another RT. That is, before and after the transition, the winning combination of the winning combination of the winning combination is different, or the winning probability of any winning combination is different even if the winning combination of the winning combination of the winning combination is the same.

  In this embodiment, non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as RTs (details of each RT will be described later). Incidentally, “non-RT” in the present embodiment does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but has the same meaning as “RT0”.

  In addition, among the RTs described above, non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 are RTs in a non-internal game (details will be described later), and RT4 is an RT in an internal game (details will be described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT also has a type 1 BB operation (RB operation). The type 1 BB operation (RB operation) is RT in a special game (details will be described later). The "special game" is also called a "bonus game" or a "bonus game".

(Display line)
The “display line” means a line on which a combination of symbols is displayed through a predetermined display window when a plurality of reels to which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively attached are stopped. Details of the display line will be described later.

  “Effective line (abbreviation of activated display line)” means a display line that is a target of display determination (activated). Further, “invalid line (abbreviation of invalidated display line)” means a display line that is not subject to display determination (invalidated). For the sake of simplicity, "the symbol is displayed on the activated line" is described as "the symbol is displayed", and "the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line" is "the symbol combination is displayed May be described. The above-mentioned "display determination" is to determine whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations. When displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is referred to as winning, the "display determination" may also be referred to as "winning determination". In that case, the “effective line” may also be referred to as the “winning line”.

(Re-play, prize, character, continuous function device)
“Re-play” means a game that can be played without betting a game medium (game medal or the like). In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device relating to the re-play is displayed, the same number of game medals as the number of game medals bet for playing the current game is automatically bet. For the sake of simplicity, "to automatically bet the same number of game medals as the number of game medals that have been bet to play this time" will be described as "game medals are automatically bet". .

  “Prize” means that a combination of symbols necessary to obtain a game medium (game medal or the like) is displayed.

  The "ordinary accessory (SB)" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning is activated, and when a specific combination of symbols is displayed. It means that the operation is ended and the operation is ended when one game is played (a result of one game is obtained).

  The "first-class special accessory (RB)" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning will operate, and operates when predetermined. However, it means that the operation can be continued until the game is played 12 times or more (the result of the game is obtained 12 times or less). In addition, the first-class special character (RB) is a character related to the first-class special character when the player wins a predetermined number of times 1 out of eight times during the operation. When the operation of the continuous operation device is completed, whichever is earlier, the operation is completed.

  The "second-class special accessory (CB)" is an accessory that activates the condition device for winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and operates when set in advance, and one game is played. It means that the operation is ended when the result of one game is obtained.

  The "feature continuous operation device (1st class BB, 2nd class BB)" is a device that can continuously operate the 1st type special character or the 2nd special character, and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. When activated, it means that it operates, and when it is determined in advance, it ends operation.

(Condition device, role)
"Condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for displaying a combination of symbols relating to winning, re-playing, winnings or operations of a winning character continuous operation device, and winning the winning role lottery. If you do, it means something that works.

  That is, the condition device is roughly classified into a condition device for winning, a condition device for re-playing, and a condition device for operating the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device.

  The condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device includes a condition device (SB) related to the operation of the normal accessory (SB) and a condition device (RB related to the operation of the first class special accessory (RB). ), A condition device (CB) related to the operation of the second class special accessory (CB), a condition device (1st class BB) related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the first class special accessory, and a second class special There is a condition device (type 2 BB) related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the accessory.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as the condition device for winning, 23 condition devices for winning (win 01 to win 23) are provided. Further, as the condition device related to the re-game, there are 11 condition devices related to the re-game (re-game 01 to re-game 11). Furthermore, as a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, there is provided a condition device (first type BB) related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device.

  The “role” refers to a lottery target of the lottery. In the present embodiment, one or more condition devices correspond to one winning combination. That is, when one of the winning combinations is won, at least one condition device corresponding to the winning combination (winning combination) is activated.

  The winning combination is a "winning winning combination" in which the condition device for winning a prize is operated, a "re-playing combination" in which a condition device for replaying is operated, and a conditioner for operating a winning product or a winning product continuous operation device. It is roughly divided into "special roles".

  The "special role" is also called a "bonus". Because, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a special combination is displayed, the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device operates, and during that operation, obtains a game medium (game medal, etc.) (obtains a special benefit). This is because you can expect

  The bonus includes a single bonus (SB) corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the normal accessory (SB) and a regular bonus (corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the first class special accessory (RB) ( RB), a challenge bonus (CB) corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the second type special accessory (CB), and a condition device related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special effect product There is a type 1 big bonus (type 1 BB), and a type 2 big bonus (type 2 BB) corresponding to a condition device related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the type 2 special accessory. In the present embodiment, one bonus (one type BB) is provided as a bonus. In addition, you may have two or more 1 type BB as a bonus, and may have another bonus (SB, RB, CB, or 2 type BB).

  In SB and CB, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the bonus ends even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus is not displayed in the game this time. That is, the winning information of these bonuses is not carried over to the next game. On the other hand, in RB, 1 type BB, and 2 type BB, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the bonus is continued until the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus is displayed. That is, the winning information of these bonuses may be carried over to the next game. And, in general, the game when the condition device corresponding to the bonus continues to operate is called "inside game (abbreviation of game in which bonus is internally won)", and the condition corresponding to the bonus The game when the device is not operating is referred to as "non-internal medium game (abbreviation of game when bonus is not internally won)". In the present embodiment, the game when the condition device corresponding to the type 1 BB is activated (when the type 1 BB is won) is included in the “non-internal medium game”. However, the game when the condition device corresponding to the type 1 BB is activated may be included in the “inside game”.

  The operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus is displayed will be described by taking the type BB as an example. 1st class BB (the accessory continuous operation device concerning the 1st class special accessory) operates when a combination of symbols corresponding to the selected 1st class BB is displayed, and continues to operate until the end condition is satisfied. For example, the ending condition can be set when the number of game medals that exceeds a predetermined number of 1 is won from the number of coins that does not exceed 285. Note that the ending condition is that when a predetermined number of times of RB operation has been performed (however, when the last RB operation has ended), a predetermined number of times of game has been played ( The result of the game of 1 times is obtained). In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected RB is displayed for RB (first type special accessory) when the first type BB (feature continuous operation device related to first type special accessory) is operating. It may be activated when it does, or it may be activated unconditionally. The 1st class BB in the present embodiment (the accessory continuous operation device relating to the 1st class special accessory) operates when a combination of symbols corresponding to the selected 1st class BB is displayed, and exceeds 285 game medals. The operation ends when is acquired. In addition, while the 1st class BB is operating, the RB (1st class special accessory) operates unconditionally, and ends the operation when there are two winnings or two games, and the 1st class When the BB termination condition is not satisfied, the RB is activated again.

  The "winning combination" is also called a "small winning combination". This is because, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is displayed, a game medium (game medal or the like) is paid out. In other words, this is because it is possible to obtain a small profit of acquiring a game medium (game medal or the like). In the present embodiment, there are 24 small winning combinations (winnings A1 to A6, winnings B1 to B3, winnings C, winnings D, winnings E, winnings F, winnings G, winnings H, winnings I, winnings J, winning prizes J, It has a prize K, a prize L, a prize M, a prize N, a prize O, a prize P, and a prize Q).

  In the small game, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the small win ends even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning small win is not displayed in the game this time. That is, the winning information of the small role is not carried over to the next game.

  The “replay role” is also called a “replay”. This is because, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed, the game medal is automatically bet and the replay can be performed (replay). In this embodiment, as replay, 15 replays (re-game A1 to re-game A6, re-game B1 to re-game B3, re-game C, re-game D, re-game E, re-game F, re-game G, re-game G. H).

  Incidentally, in the replay, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay is not displayed in the game this time, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the replay ends. That is, the replay winning information is not carried over to the next game.

  In the present embodiment, as a part of the small winning combination, there is a small winning combination (pushing order bell (winning prize A group, winning prize B group)) with different game results obtained by operating the stop switch 35. Further, as a part of the replay, there is a replay (a push order replay (re-play A group, re-play B group)) in which the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. As will be described later in detail, the prize A group is a generic name of prizes A1 to A6, the prize B group is a generic name of prizes B1 to B3, and the re-game A group is a generic name of re-games A1 to A6. , Re-game B group is a generic term for re-game B1 to re-game B3.

  Here, the “operation mode of the stop switch 35” is a high-level concept indicating the pressing order (pressing order) of the stop switch 35 and the timing of pressing the stop switch 35.

  The "advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" means an operation mode for obtaining an advantageous game result when the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Specifically, the operation mode for displaying the combination of the symbols having the larger number of game media (game medals, etc.) that can be acquired, and the combination of the symbols which is an advantageous transition condition to the RT. It means an operation mode for displaying and an operation mode for not displaying a combination of symbols which is a disadvantageous transition condition to the RT.

  The "advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" is also referred to as "correct operation mode of the stop switch 35". Therefore, for example, when the “operation mode of the stop switch 35” indicates the pressing order of the stop switch 35, the “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as “correct answer pressing order of the stop switch 35”.

  The "unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35" means an operation mode for obtaining an unfavorable game result when the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Specifically, an operation mode for displaying a combination of symbols having a smaller number of game media (game medals, etc.) that can be acquired, and a combination of symbols which is an advantageous transition condition to RT. It means an operation mode for not displaying or an operation mode for displaying a combination of symbols which is a disadvantageous transition condition to the RT.

  The "unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35" is also referred to as "incorrect operation mode of the stop switch 35". Therefore, for example, when the “operation mode of the stop switch 35” indicates the pressing order of the stop switch 35, the “unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as “unauthorized pressing order of the stop switch 35”. .

  The "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" in the present embodiment means a game that wins a push order bell (winning group A, win group B) or a push order replay (replaying group A, re-playing group). This is a game that is won in the game B group).

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the incorrect push order, which condition is operating depending on the timing when the stop switch is operated. The combination of symbols corresponding to the device may not be displayed. In this way, the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed is also referred to as "((winning) missed ((winning)) dropped"). Then, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, when the push order bell (prize A group) is missed, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed. .

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (winning group B) is won, no dropout occurs regardless of the press order of the stop switch 35. That is, the combination of symbols corresponding to any operating condition device is always displayed. Even in the game in which the push order bell (prize B group) is won, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong push order, a dropout may occur.

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order replay (replay A group, replay B group) is won, no dropout occurs regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35. That is, the combination of symbols corresponding to any operating condition device is always displayed.

(Instruction function)
The “instruction function” is a function of instructing (notifying) the aforementioned “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35”. The “instruction function” is a function for operating a main control board (corresponding to the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 4) that controls a game, and for example, a predetermined display device electrically connected to the main control board 60. In addition, information that can identify an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35 is displayed (notified).

  The “instruction function” can be interpreted in the following broad and narrow senses, and in the present embodiment, an annotation is made as to whether the “instruction function” is in the broad sense or in the narrow sense, as necessary.

  The "instruction function" in a broad sense is a function for instructing "an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" in a small win or a game in which a replay is won in which the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. That is, the "instruction function" in a broad sense means, in a game that wins the push order bell (winning group A, win group B) or a game that wins the push order replay (replaying group A, replaying group B). This is a function for instructing the "correct answer pressing order of the stop switch 35".

  The "instruction function" in a narrow sense is a function of instructing "an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" in a game in which a small winning combination having different game results obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is won. That is, the "instruction function" in a narrow sense is a function of instructing the "correct answer push order of the stop switch 35" in the game in which the push order bell (winning group A, winning group B) is won.

  The “instruction function” is also a function of notifying of “an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35”. That is, the “instruction function” is also the “notification function”.

  "Instruction function operation game" means a game that operates an instruction function. That is, the instruction function operation game is a one-time game. Even if a small win or a replay game in which the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different, if the instruction function is not operated, the game is not the instruction function operation game.

(Other)
"Setting difference" means a difference between settings. That is, “a winning combination having no difference in winning probability” means that the winning probability is the same in all settings. Further, “a winning combination having a difference in winning probability” means a winning combination having different winning probabilities between at least two settings.

  "Setting" means a combination of probabilities that respective condition devices related to winning, re-play, operation of a role object or a role product continuous operation device operate. In the present embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate. Specifically, of the six settings of setting 1 to setting 6, the payout rate in setting 6 is the highest. Note that the lower the setting, the higher the payout rate may be designed.

  The "ball payout rate" means a value calculated by "the number of game media (game medals or the like) to be paid out / the number of game media (game medals or the like) to be bet". When the payout rate is "1", it means that the game media (game medals, etc.) are neither increasing nor decreasing. When the payout rate exceeds "1", it means that the number of game media (game medals, etc.) is increasing. When the payout rate is less than "1", it means that the number of game media (game medals, etc.) has decreased.

  “PB = 1” means that the desired symbol can be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. In the present embodiment, the symbols from the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated to the symbols four points ahead can be displayed (retracted). For example, referring to FIG. 17 described later, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" of the left reel 39a is located on the activated line (upper left row), four points from there Up to the bell symbol with the symbol number “5” are the symbols that can be displayed on the activated line (upper left row).

  Further referring to FIG. 17, the symbol 5 symbols ahead of the replay symbol of the symbol number “1” on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of the symbol number “6”. Further, the symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of the symbol number "6" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of the symbol number "11". Further, the symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of the symbol number "11" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of the symbol number "16". Then, the symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of the symbol number "16" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of the symbol number "1". That is, the replay symbol on the left reel 39a is a symbol that can be displayed on the activated line (upper left row) regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 35a is operated. That is, the replay symbol of the left reel 39a is "PB = 1". Regarding the symbol combination, "PB = 1" means that all the symbols constituting the symbol combination are "PB = 1".

  “PB ≠ 1” means that the desired symbol cannot be displayed on the activated line depending on the timing when the stop switch 35 is operated. Regarding the symbol combination, when "PB ≠ 1", it means that at least one of the symbols constituting the symbol combination is "PB ≠ 1".

  When the game is played as "N-1" game item, "N" game item, "N + 1" game item, ... (N is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game item. , The game of the "N" game is called the "current game". Further, a game of the "N-1" game is called a "previous game", and a game of the "N + 1" game is called a "next game".

  The "difference number" means a value calculated by "the number of paid game medals-the number of bet game medals".

  In this specification, the suffix "(B)" to the end of a numerical value (especially the end of 8-bit data) means a binary numerical value. Similarly, when "(D)" is added to the end of the numerical value, it means that the numerical value is a decimal number. Similarly, when "(H)" is added to the end of the numerical value, it means that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number. Specifically, the decimal number "16" is described as "00010000 (B)" in the binary number, "16 (D)" in the decimal number, and "10 (H)" in the hexadecimal number. To do. However, when it is obvious which is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” are omitted.

  Further, in binary notation other than the 8-bit numerical value, the trailing “(B)” is omitted. For example, “0” in a notation such as “the value of the A register is“ 0 ”” actually means the binary number “00000000 (B)”, but this is omitted and “0” is omitted. May be.

  In addition, the value of the 2-byte register may be expressed in hexadecimal. For example, the "HL register" is a combination of an H register and an L register of 1 byte each, and is a register (sometimes called a pair register) capable of storing 2 bytes of information as a whole. , "The value of the HL register is" F02A (H) "". At this time, regarding the values of the individual registers, as an example, when the H register stores the upper bits and the L register stores the lower bits, the value of the H register is “F0 (H)”, that is, “1110000 (B)”. Then, the value of the L register becomes "2A (H)", that is, "00101010 (B)".

  Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[2. Outline configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the chassis of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a base body 1 and a front door (front cover or front door) that opens / closes the front surface of the base body 1 with an opening / closing shaft as a support shaft. 2). Although not shown in FIG. 1, when the front door 2 is opened, the opening is detected by a door switch 15 described later.

  Inside the base 1, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a game medal payout device 49 including a hopper 50, a symbol display device 38 including three reels 39, and the like are accommodated. The game medal payout device 49 can pay out the game medals from the payout opening 53 (see FIG. 2).

  Further, a board case 16 for accommodating the main control board 60 therein is attached to the back surface on the inner surface side of the base 1. It should be noted that the board case 16 and the main control board 60 are higher than the symbol display device 38 in order to easily visually confirm the state of the caulked portion of the board case 16 when the front door 2 is opened. It is installed in a position that is easy to see.

  The caulked portion of the substrate case 16 is a sealing member that seals the substrate case 16, and the substrate case 16 is configured so that it cannot be opened without breaking the caulked portion. The main control board 60 is housed in the transparent board case 16 sealed by the caulking portion so that the main control board 60 cannot be accessed without breaking the caulking portion, and high security is ensured. . Further, a sticker (a sticker stating the unsealed record of the caulked portion) is attached to the surface of the board case 16 to prove that the main control board accommodated therein is the proper main control board 60. . A set value display LED 66 (a digit 5 described later) for displaying the set value is mounted on the main control board 60.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the rear surface side of the front door 2, at the upper part of the display window 17 (in the vicinity of the rear side of the image display device 21 shown in FIG. 2), a transparent sub-control board 80 is housed inside. The board case is attached. The sub control board 80 is electrically connected to the main control board 60 by a harness or an optical fiber (neither is shown).

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, under the condition that the front door 2 is open, the start switch 34 provided in front of the front door 2 from the rear surface of the front door 2 through the display window 17. Is visible. With this configuration, when the hall clerk tries to operate the start switch 34 during the setting change described later, even if the front door 2 is open, the rear door of the front door 2 can be operated. The position of the start switch 34 provided in front of the front door 2 can be confirmed through the display window 17, and the operation of the start switch 34 can be smoothly performed during the setting change. In other words, since the parts in front of the front door 2 can be confirmed from the rear of the front door 2, even if the front door 2 is open, the parts in front of the front door 2 can be checked. Easy to operate.

  FIG. 2 is a front external view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 shows an external view of the slot machine 10 illustrated in FIG. 1 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a display window 17 is provided near the front center of the slot machine 10 so that a part of the reel 39 (design) can be visually recognized. Above the display window 17, an image display device 21 that performs an effect (displays an image) is provided. A start switch 34 and a stop switch 35 (left stop switch 35a, middle stop switch 35b, right stop switch 35c) are provided below the display window 17. Further, various operation switches and the like operated by the player are provided above the start switch 34 and the stop switch 35 and at the portion protruding from below the display window 17.

  FIG. 3 is a top view of a part of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 shows a portion provided with various operation switches and the like of the slot machine 10 when viewed from above.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a display device (reserved number display LED 45, acquired number display LED 47, status display LED 48), a part of operation switches (1 bet switch 33a, 3 bet switch 33b, settlement switch) in order from the left side in the figure. 36), a cross key (also referred to as "cursor key") 22, a menu button 23, an effect button 24, and a game medal insertion slot 26 are arranged.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of each configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 is merely an example of the arrangement in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be arranged at the illustrated position, and may be changed to an arbitrary position. You may. Specifically, for example, the display device may be arranged on the left side of the display window 17. Further, all the configurations shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 do not necessarily have to be arranged. Specifically, for example, if the effect button 24 also has the function of the menu button 23, the menu button 23 may not be arranged. As described above, when the number of components is reduced by sharing the functions, not only the effect of suppressing the manufacturing cost of parts can be expected, but also the operation switches can be arranged at intervals to prevent erroneous operations by the player. The effect can be expected.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an outline of control in the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 shows a representative example of the configuration required to perform each control in the slot machine 10, and each configuration will be described in detail. In FIG. 4, solid arrows connecting the components indicate the input / output directions of signals and the like.

[2-1. Main control board]
First, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a typical control board, a main control board that controls a game (also called "main control board", "main control means", "main control means"). 60, and a sub-control board (also referred to as “sub-control board”, “sub-control means”, “sub-control means”) 80 for controlling effects and the like.

  The main control board 60 includes an input port 61, an output port 62, a RWM (Read Write Memory) 63, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 64, and a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 65. Note that FIG. 4 is merely an example, and the configuration of the main control board 60 is not limited to this.

  The input port 61 is a connection unit for inputting signals to the main CPU 65 from a game peripheral device (for example, various operation switches such as the bet switch 33). Generally, the input port 61 is composed of a plurality of ports. In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are three ports, "input port_0", input port_1, and input port_2. In the following description, for simplification, the above input ports are referred to as “input port 0”, “input port 1”, and “input port 2” in order. This notation also applies to the output port 62 described below.

  The output port 62 is a connection unit from which a signal is output from the main CPU 65 to a peripheral device for gaming (for example, the motor 40 or the like). That is, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) and these peripheral devices for games are electrically connected via the input port 61 and the output port 62. Like the input port 61, the output port 62 is generally composed of multiple ports. In the present embodiment, the output port 62 has nine ports, “output port 0” to “output port 8”.

  The number of input ports 61 and the number of output ports 62 are examples, and the number is not limited to the above example.

  Specific signals handled by the input port 61 and the output port 62 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 16.

  The RWM 63 is a storage device (also referred to as "storage means") capable of reading and writing data, and various data (for example, timer value) necessary for the main CPU 65 (main control board 60) to control a game. ) Etc. are memorized. The RWM 63 is also called a main memory.

  The ROM 64 is a read-only storage device (also referred to as "storage means"), and programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the main CPU 65 (main control board 60) to control the game. Memorize

  The main CPU 65 refers to a CPU mounted on the main control board 60, and controls a game according to a program stored in the ROM 64 (for example, winning a lottery). Further, the main CPU 65 has a plurality of registers such as A register to L register (also referred to as general purpose register) and a register for data transmission (also referred to as built-in register).

  On the main control board 60 of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) including an RWM 63, a ROM 64, and a main CPU 65 is mounted. The RWM 63 and the ROM 64 may be mounted outside the MPU (however, on the main control board 60). Similarly, the MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later, but the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 are external to the MPU (however, on the sub-control board 80). ) May also be installed.

  In the main control board 60, the game is controlled by the operation of the main CPU 65 (may be regarded as an MPU), and each means of the main control board 60 described later (for example, a winning lottery means 69 etc.) is realized. Details of each of these means will be described later.

[2-2. Game medal selector]
Next, the game medal selector 27 among the peripheral devices for games will be described. The game medal insertion slot 26 shown in FIG. 4 is an insertion slot for accepting maintenance of game medals. The maintained game medals are sent to the inside of the game medal selector 27.

  Here, FIGS. 5 and 6 exemplify the detailed structure of the game medal selector. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the game medal selector, and FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the vicinity of the blocker arranged in the game medal selector.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 6, the game medal selector 27 includes a passage sensor 28, a blocker 29, and a loading sensor 30 (individually, for example, loading sensors 30a and 30b), and a main control board 60. Is electrically connected to. In addition, in FIG. 4, a broken line with an arrow near the game medal selector 27 indicates a flow of processing when the game medal is cared for.

  The game medals that have been maintained through the game medal slot 26 are configured to be guided to a series of passages (game medal passages) formed inside the slot machine 10 and pass through the game medal selector 27. Then, the game medals flowing down the game medal passage are finally sent to the hopper 50 or returned from the payout opening 53. The details will be described below.

  The maintained game medal is guided from the entrance 27a (see FIG. 5) into the game medal selector 27, and first detected by a passage sensor (sometimes called a selector passage sensor) 28. Here, in the slot machine 10, two types of game medal passages are prepared as passages for the inserted game medals (game medal passages) depending on whether or not acceptance of the game medals is permitted (permitted / not permitted). There is. The permission / non-permission is distributed by a blocker 29 provided downstream of the passage sensor 28 (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 6, the blocker 29 is provided so as to be displaceable between a permission position (ON state) and a non-permission position (OFF state) according to a permission state / non-permission state regarding acceptance of game medals. Thus, it has a function of allocating permission / non-permission of acceptance of the inserted game medals.

  When the blocker 29 is in a state of permitting acceptance of game medals (permission position), the inserted game medals are guided to the permitted game medal passage. At this time, the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 flow down in the permitted game medal passage, and the insertion sensor 30 (for example, a plurality of optical sensors, which are provided further downstream of the blocker 29, individually After being detected by the input sensors 30a, 30b), the toner is sent from the exit 27b to the outside of the game medal selector 27 and then sent to the hopper 50.

  The insertion sensor 30 is, for example, an optical sensor, and a plurality of insertion sensors may be installed along the game medal passage. In the present embodiment, as an example, two closing sensors 30 are arranged by the closing sensor 30a arranged on the upstream side and the closing sensor 30b arranged on the downstream side. In addition, in the following description, the upstream loading sensor 30a may be referred to as a "loading sensor 1" and the downstream loading sensor 30b may be referred to as a "loading sensor 2".

  On the other hand, when the blocker 29 is in a state where the acceptance of the game medals is not permitted (non-permitted position), the inserted game medals are guided to the non-permitted game medal passage. At this time, the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 is sent out of the game medal selector 27 from the outlet 27c without being detected by the insertion sensor 30 by flowing down the game medal passage in the unauthorized state. It is returned from the outlet 53.

  The control of permission / non-permission by the blocker 29 will be supplemented. In the slot machine 10, the blocker 29 displays the game medals during the game (from the rotation of the reel 39 to the stop of the rotation of all reels 39 (when the game medals are paid out, until the payout of the game medals is completed)). Do not allow acceptance (not allowed). That is, the blocker 29 permits the game medal to be accepted (in the permitted state) at least when the game is not being played.

[2-3. Operation switch]
Next, the operation switch 32 of the game peripheral device will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a bet switch 33 (1 bet switch 33a, 3 bet switch 33b), a start switch 34, and a stop switch 35 (left stop switch) are provided on the main control board 60 as operation switches 32 operated by the player. 35a, a middle stop switch 35b, a right stop switch 35c), and a settlement switch 36 are electrically connected.

  The bet switch 33 is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored game medals. In the present embodiment, as the bet switch 33, a 1 bet switch 33a for betting one game medal and a 3 bet switch (MAX bet switch) 40b for betting three (regulated number, maximum number) game medals. I have it. However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a two bet switch for betting two game medals may be provided, or any one bet switch may be provided.

  By operating the 1-bet switch 33a a plurality of times, a plurality of game medals can be bet. Specifically, two game medals can be bet by operating the 1 bet switch 33a twice, and three game medals can be bet by operating the 1 bet switch 33a three times. You can Further, when the 3-bet switch 33b is operated (pressed) while one or more (less than three) game medals are being bet, the already-bet number is subtracted from three. You can bet a certain number of game medals. Specifically, for example, when the 3 bet switch 33b is operated while one game medal is bet, two game medals are bet.

  The start switch 34 is a switch operated by the player when rotating the reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c). In other words, it is a switch operated by the player when starting the game.

  The stop switch 35 is a switch operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reel 39. In this embodiment, as the stop switch 35, three stop switches 35 (a left stop switch 35a, a middle stop switch 35b, a right stop switch 35c) are provided. The three stop switches 35 correspond to the three reels 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c) in a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the left stop switch 35a is a switch operated when stopping the rotation of the left reel 39a.

  In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player stops the rotation of the three reels 39 (although the stop switch 35 should be operated in the instructed order when the instruction function operates). To do so, the corresponding three stop switches 35 can be operated in any order. At this time, the stop switch 35 operated first is referred to as the "first stop switch 35", and similarly, the stop switch 35 operated second is the "second stop switch 35" and third operated. The stop switch 35 is called a "third stop switch 35".

  The settlement switch 36 is a switch operated by the player when paying out the betted game medals and / or when the accumulated game medals are paid out.

[2-4. Display devices for game medals, digits]
Next, the display device will be described among the game peripheral devices. As shown in FIG. 4, the display board 44 of the game medal display device 43 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. Although not shown, a relay board is actually provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 44, the main control board 60 and the relay board are connected to each other, and The display substrate 44 is connected. The main control board 60 and the display board 44 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween. This is also applicable to the other control boards illustrated in FIG. 4, and specifically, for example, one or more other separate boards (relay boards, etc.) are provided between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80. It may have an intervening configuration.

  On the display substrate 44, a stored number display LED 45, an acquired number display LED 47, and a status display LED 48 are mounted. Each of these LEDs is provided near the operation switch operated by the player at a position where the player can always visually recognize it. It is not necessary for all of these LEDs to be mounted on one display board 44. For example, a plurality of display boards 44 such as display boards 44A, 44B, ... The LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, and the status display LED 48) may be mounted on a plurality of display boards 44 in a distributed manner.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an arrangement example of a display device and operation switches. FIG. 7 is an enlarged image view of a part of the front surface of the slot machine 10. Arrangement of a stored number display LED 45, an acquired number display LED 47, a state display LED 48, a settlement switch 36, a 1 bet switch 33a, and a 3 bet switch 33b. An example is shown. Further, the display substrate 44 shown by the broken line in FIG. 7 is arranged on the back side of the stored number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, and the state display LED 48 (that is, inside the slot machine 10). Each configuration will be described in detail with reference to the arrangement example of FIG. 7.

  The stored number display LED 45 is a display device that displays the number of stored game medals, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 45 shown in FIG. 7 can display the number of stored game medals in two digits.

  “Digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, one digit is seven segments A to G (7 rod-shaped LEDs that display alphanumeric characters) and segment DP (digital point). It is composed of one dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 44 is four, that is, the digits 1 to 4, but the main control substrate 60 can be mounted with a plurality of other digits. (For example, the set value display LED 66 and the management information display LED 67). In the present embodiment, another digit 5 is mounted on the main control board 60, and this digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 66.

  The stored number display LED 45 displays the number of stored game medals (stored medals), and specifically displays a two-digit number “00” to “50” (an integer). For example, when no game medals have been bet and no game medals are stored, the display of the stored number display LED 45 is "00". In this state, when one game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26, one game medal is bet. Further, when two game medals are inserted, three game medals are bet when the prescribed number is three. Therefore, if the number of inserted game medals is up to 3, no game medals are stored. However, when the number of inserted game medals exceeds 3, the excess game medals are stored and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 45.

  The slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment can store up to 50 game medals. Therefore, when the stored number is 50 (when the stored number display LED 45 displays "50"), even if a game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26, the game medal is not stored. Specifically, when the stored number is 50, the blocker 29 is in the disapproval state (in the disapproval position), so that the inserted game medals pass through the disapproved game medal passage to the payout port. It will be returned from 53.

  Further, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to the condition device for winning is displayed, and when the game medal is paid out, rather than the game medal being actually paid out from the payout opening 53. Priority is given to addition (payout) as the number of stored game medals. For example, when the number of stored coins is "10" (when the stored coin number display LED 45 is displaying "10"), when nine game medals are paid out, the stored coin number is "19" and The stored number display LED 45 displays "19".

  However, by adding as the number of stored game medals, when the number of stored medals exceeds "50", the extra game medals are actually paid out from the payout opening 53. For example, when the number of stored games is “47” (when the stored number display LED 45 displays “47”), when 9 game medals are paid out, the number of stored game medals is 3 The number of stored sheets is added, the number of stored sheets becomes “50”, and the stored number display LED 45 displays “50”. Then, the remaining six game medals are paid out from the payout opening 53.

  Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device relating to the re-play is displayed, the game medal is automatically bet. For example, when three game medals have been bet on the game, three game medals are automatically bet. By the way, since the bet is made to perform the replay, even if the settlement switch 36 is operated after the bet (before the start switch 34 for the replay is operated), the bet is automatically generated. Betting game medals are not refunded.

  The acquired number display LED 47 is a display device that displays the number of acquired (paid) game medals, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. That is, the acquired number display LED 47 shown in FIG. 7 can display the number of acquired game medals in two digits, like the stored number display LED 45.

  The acquired number display LED 47 displays, for example, "00" when no game medal is acquired (is not paid out), but is one game when nine game medals are acquired (paid out). Each time the medals are paid out, the medals are sequentially displayed from "00" (finally "09" is displayed). Thereby, when the game medals in the hopper 50 are emptied while paying out the nine game medals, the accurate payout status can be displayed.

  It should be noted that the acquired number display LED 47 may display nothing when no game medal is acquired (is not paid out), or may display “0” only in the digit 4 of the lower digit. .

  Further, the acquired number display LED 47 functions as an error information display LED that displays information (error information) indicating the detected error when an error is detected. For example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the acquired number display LED 47 displays error information “dE” indicating the door open error. During the setting change described later, the error information "dE" indicating the door open error is not displayed even when the front door 2 is open. However, after the setting change is completed, error information “dE” indicating a door open error may be displayed.

  Further, when the instruction function is activated, the acquired number display LED 47 also functions as an instruction information display LED that displays information (pushing order instruction information) for instructing an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order). Therefore, the acquired number display LED 47 is a display device having a function as an acquired number display LED, a function as an error information display LED, and a function as an instruction information display LED.

  Here, as an example of a display method for switching the display of the push order instruction information (“= 1” in the following example) to the display of the payout number of game medals on the acquired number display LED 47, the display is temporarily reset before switching. Therefore, another display may be performed. Specifically, for example, when displaying "00" for resetting and finally displaying the payout of nine game medals, "= 1" → "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → It becomes “09”. Further, for example, when the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off for resetting, “= 1” → “**” → “01” → “02” → ... “09”. It should be noted that “*” indicating the display content of the digit (LED) means extinguishing (non-displaying), and when both the two digit digits are extinguished, it is expressed as “**”.

  Further, the image display device 21 connected to the sub-control board 80, which will be described later, also functions as a notification device that notifies an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) when the main control board 60 operates the instruction function. .

  In the following specification, the display of the pressing order by the main control board 60 using the acquired number display LED 47 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub control board 80 is referred to as “notification of the pressing order”. To call. A number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “pressing order instruction number”, and display content of the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by “operation of the instruction function” is referred to as “pressing order instruction information”. That is, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the operation of the instruction function.

  The status display LED 48 is a display device for displaying the status of the game in the slot machine 10. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, from 7 LEDs (individually, the status display LEDs 48a to 48g). It is configured. The role of each LED will be described.

  The status display LED 48a is an LED (replay display LED) that is turned on when winning a replay. The status display LED 48a lights up when an automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is made, thereby informing the player of the automatic bet status.

  The status display LED 48b is an LED (insertable display LED) that lights up in a state where a game medal can be inserted. The status display LED 48b lights up after the game is over and before a game medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, thereby indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In addition, in the present embodiment, even after the replay is activated, the state display LED 48b is turned on when the bet can be made according to the stored number.

  The status display LED 48c is an LED (payment display LED) that is turned on during the payment process. More specifically, the state display LED 48c actually pays out the game medal when the settlement switch 36 is turned on in the state where the accumulated medal and / or the bet medal (excluding the automatic bet at the time of the replay prize) are held. Lights up in the middle.

  The status display LED 48d is an LED (game start LED) that is turned on when a game medal is inserted and the start switch 34 becomes operable. Therefore, the status display LED 48d does not light up when the game medals are not bet up to the specified number (or the automatic bet at the time of the replay winning is not bet).

  The status display LED 48e to the status display LED 48g are LEDs (insertion display LEDs) that display the number of game medals betted on each. Specifically, when one game medal is bet, the status display LED 48e (one-insertion display LED) lights up. When two game medals are bet, the state display LED 48f (two-sheet insertion display LED) is turned on in addition to the state display LED 48e (one-sheet insertion display LED). When three game medals are bet, in addition to the status display LED 48e (single insertion display LED) and the status display LED 48f (two insertion display LED), the status display LED 48g (three insertion display LED) lights up. .

  The set value display LED 66 is a display device that displays the current set value when confirming the setting or changing the setting, and is composed of the digit 5. The stored number display LED 45 or the acquired number display LED 47 may also have a function as a set value display LED.

  The management information display LED 67 is a display device that displays predetermined management information, and is composed of, for example, four digits. In order to ensure the visibility of each digit, it is preferable that one digit is designed to have a size satisfying “horizontal width m1 × vertical width n ≧ 36 square millimeters”. Alternatively, it is preferable that the four digits arranged in one horizontal line are designed to have a size satisfying “horizontal width m2 × vertical width n / 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters”.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of using the digit. First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the digits 1 to 5. As shown in FIG. 8A, the digit is a segment LED including seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP.

  FIG. 8B summarizes an example of applications of the segments A to G and the segment DP in each of the digits 1 to 5.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the segments A to G of the digit 1 are used as the upper digits of the stored number display LED 45. The segments A to G of the digit 2 are used as the lower digits of the stored number display LED 45. The segments A to G of the digit 3 are used as the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 47. The segments A to G of the digit 4 are used as the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 47. In addition, none of the segments DP of digit 1 to digit 4 is unused.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the segments A to G of the digit 5 are used as the set value display LEDs 66. In addition, the segment DP of the digit 5 is used as an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, when only the segments A to G of the set value display LED 66 (digit 5) are lit, it means that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segments A to G and the segment DP are lit, the setting is being changed. means. The segment DP of the digit 5 may be used as an LED that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining the segment data. As shown in FIG. 8C, the segment data for designating the display contents of each digit is 1-byte (8-bit) data. Each bit of the segment data is described in a binary number, "0" means off, and "1" means on.

  For example, when displaying "0" in the digit 1, it is necessary to turn on the segments A to F of the digit 1 and turn off the segments G and DP. That is, the segment data in this case is “00111111 (B)”.

[2-5. Symbol display device, game medal payout device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the motor 40 of the symbol display device 38 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The symbol display device 38 includes three reels 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c), a motor 40 that drives each reel 39, and a reel sensor 41 for detecting the position of the reel 39. It is configured to include.

  The reel 39 is a ring-shaped one, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape having a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination) printed thereon is attached. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 39 will be described later.

  Further, each reel 39 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 39, and is used when detecting whether the reel 39 has passed a predetermined position, or has made one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 41, and the signal of the reel sensor 41 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the reel sensor 41 detects the index (the index cuts the reel sensor 41), the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 39 has passed a predetermined position.

  The symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 41 detects the index of the reel 39 is stored in the ROM 64 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a game medal payout device 49 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The game medal payout device 49 is a hopper 50 for accumulating game medals, a hopper motor 51 that is driven when paying out the game medals accumulated in the hopper 50, and a payout by driving the hopper motor 51. It is provided with a payout sensor 52 for detecting the played game medal.

  As described above, the game medals thrown in (accepted) from the game medal slot 26 are sent to the predetermined game medal passage and sent to the hopper 50.

  The payout sensor 52 (payout sensors 52a, 52b) is a set (two) of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined interval. According to the payout sensor 52, the paid-out game medal has the other payout sensor 52 (for example, the payout sensor 52 (for example, It is adapted to be detected by the payout sensor 52b). Then, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game medals are correctly paid out, based on the signals from the respective payout sensors 52.

  For example, when the signals from any of the payout sensors 52 are off even though the hopper motor 51 is being driven, the main control board 60 causes the hopper 50 to become empty and a hopper error (correctly It has not been paid out). Further, for example, when the signal from at least one of the payout sensors 52 remains ON, the main control board 60 determines that the game medals are clogged (the game medals are not paid out correctly).

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 10 can be provided with a sub-tank for storing the game medals overflowing from the hopper 50, and to detect that the game medals in the sub-tank are full. Multiple full sensors may be provided. The full sensor can be composed of, for example, a circuit in which the game medals housed in the sub-tank are energized when the game medals come into contact with a plurality of full detection sensors, and a signal (full The detection signal) is transmitted to the main control board 60 (a full error can be executed).

  Supplementary information about the sub tank and full sensor. As an example, it is assumed that the slot machine 10 has at least a first full detection sensor and a second full detection sensor as a plurality of full detection sensors (the number is not limited to two). The distance between the first full detection sensor and the second detection sensor is “A”. Further, the length of the connection component 54 (for example, the screws 54a, 54b, 54c shown in FIG. 1) for fixing the symbol display device (reel unit) 38 is set to "B". The connection parts 54 (screws 54a to 54c) are parts that easily loosen when the front door 2 is opened or closed (vibration of the slot machine 10 can also be a factor), and if they come off, they fall inside the housing. Have the potential. For example, in the case of FIG. 1, the screw 54c arranged on the opening side of the front door 2 can be said to be a component that is particularly easy to loosen. Although the screws 54a to 54c are given as specific examples for clarifying the description, the connection component 54 may be replaced with another component attached to the slot machine 10.

  Here, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of full detection sensors are arranged so that the relationship of “A> B” is established. Even when three or more full detection sensors are provided, the plurality of full detection sensors are set so that the relationship “A> B” is established when the minimum distance between the full detection sensors is A. Deploy. Further, the connection component 54 (at least one of them, and not all of the screws 54a to 54c) is configured to be housed in the sub tank when it freely falls. In other words, the sub tank is arranged vertically below the connection component 54.

  By arranging the plurality of full detection sensors and the sub tanks in this way, the following effects can be obtained in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  First, by arranging the sub tank vertically below the connection component 54 (screws 54a to 54c), for example, even if the screw 54c is accidentally removed, the sub tank can be accommodated in the sub tank. Loss can be prevented. In addition, by preventing the screw 54c from entering the hopper 50, it is possible to expect an effect of preventing the operation failure of the hopper 50 due to the mixing of the screw 54c.

  Further, when the dropped connection component 54 (for example, the screw 54c) is accommodated in the sub-tank, if the screw 54c is caught between the full detection sensors, the screw 54c energizes the circuit of the full sensor. Even if the game medal is not full, a full detection signal is erroneously transmitted, and the main control board 60 erroneously executes a full error (“FE” error). However, in the present embodiment, since the plurality of full detection sensors are arranged so that the relationship of “A> B” is established as described above (the interval between the full detection sensors is longer than the length of the screw 54c). Since it is long), the dropped screw 54c is accommodated in the sub tank without being caught by the full detection sensor. That is, since there is no possibility that the connection component 54 (screws 54a to 54c) will be caught between the plurality of fullness detection sensors, even if the connection component 54 is accidentally detached, it is detected by the fullness detection sensor due to the influence of the connection component 54. The signal (full detection signal) can be prevented from being transmitted. That is, even if the connection parts 54 (screws 54a to 54c) are detached during the game, a full error does not occur, so that the game can be continued without hindering the game.

[2-6. Switch, external terminal board]
As shown in FIG. 4, a power switch 11, a setting key switch 12, a setting change / reset switch 13, a setting door switch 14, a door switch 15, and an external terminal board 100 are electrically connected to the main control board 60. Has been done.

  The power switch 11 is a switch operated by a hall clerk when turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.

  The setting key switch 12 is a switch operated by a hall clerk when confirming the setting or changing the setting. For example, when the hall clerk confirms the setting, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion opening and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) while the power is on. Also, for example, when the hall clerk changes the setting, when the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, rotated 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise), and then the power is turned on. Turn on.

  The setting change / reset switch 13 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch (setting switch) and a reset switch. Note that these switches may be provided separately.

  When treated as a setting change switch, the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated by a hall clerk when changing the setting. For example, when the hall clerk changes the setting, he or she operates the setting change / reset switch 13 and the start switch 34 until the desired setting is changed. The setting value is incremented by "1" every time the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated ("1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ... ). In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, settings 1 to 6 are set in “six stages”.

  When treated as a reset switch, the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated by a hall clerk when initializing (resetting) predetermined data (for example, error data) stored in the RWM 63. Specifically, when the setting change / reset switch 13 is turned on while the power is on, resetting is performed.

  The setting door switch 14 is a switch that detects opening / closing of a door (not shown) that covers the setting key switch 12 and the setting change / reset switch 13. For example, when the setting door switch 14 is off (closed) and the setting key switch 12 is on (setting key is being inserted), an error occurs.

  The door switch 15 is for detecting opening / closing of the front door 2. For example, when the front door 2 is open (the front surface of the base body is open), the door switch 15 is turned on.

  The external terminal board 100 is a board that relays / transfers an external signal (outer end signal) output from a part of the output port 62 to the outside of the slot machine 10.

  Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (for example, the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, in addition to the information on the game such as the bonus state, the AT state, the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game medals, the information about the game machine such as an error or power off is output as an external signal. . The external signal is output by the main control board 60 (external signal transmitting means 77 described later) and transmitted to the outside via the external terminal board 100.

  An example of a specific external signal in this embodiment is shown in D0 bit to D4 bit of the output port 6 in FIG. 10 described later.

[2-7. Input port, output port]
As described above, the main control board 60 includes the input port 61 (for example, the input ports 0 to 2) and the output port 62 (for example, the output ports 0 to 8) each of which is composed of a plurality of ports. Hereinafter, specific examples of these ports in the present embodiment will be described.

  In this embodiment, each of the input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 8 has 1-bit D0 to D7, and is a port capable of inputting or outputting 1 byte (8 bits). The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment can be provided with an input port 61 or an output port 62 other than those shown below, but the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the input ports 0 to 2. Further, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the output ports 3 to 6.

  According to FIG. 9, in the input port 0, the signal of the setting change / reset switch 13 (setting change / reset switch signal) is input to the D0 bit, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 (setting key switch signal) is input to the D1 bit. The signal of the door switch 15 (door switch signal) is input to the D2 bit. A signal output when a power failure occurs (power failure detection signal) is input to the D6 bit, and a full sensor signal (full detection signal) is input to the D7 bit.

  Although the D3 bit to the D5 bit of the input port 0 are “unused” in FIG. 9, the port indicated as “unused” in FIGS. 9 to 16 is when the port is not actually used, or This means any of the cases where the description is omitted, and does not necessarily mean that there is no signal input / output.

  Further, in FIGS. 9 and 10, “positive” and “negative” are described for each bit of the port. This means that the digital circuit of the bit is “positive logic” or “negative logic”. Means there is. For example, according to FIG. 9, the setting key switch signal input to the D1 bit of the input port 0 has a negative logic. In this case, a "high" signal is input to the D1 bit when the setting key switch 12 is not operated, and a "negative" signal is input to the D1 bit when the setting key switch 12 is operated. Is entered. In other words, as for the setting key switch signal, a "negative" signal becomes an active signal. The opposite is true for positive logic.

  According to FIG. 9, the input port 1 receives the signal of the left stop switch 35a (left stop switch signal) at the D0 bit, the signal of the middle stop switch 35b at the D1 bit, and the D2 bit. The signal of the right stop switch 35c (right stop switch signal) is input to the bit. The signal of the 3-bet switch 33b (3-bet switch signal) is input to the D3 bit, and the signal of the 1-bet switch 33a (1-bet switch signal) is input to the D4 bit. Further, the signal of the settlement switch 36 (the settlement switch signal) is input to the D5 bit, and the signal of the start switch 34 (start switch signal) is input to the D6 bit. Bit D7 is "unused". When the bet switch 33 in the slot machine 10 has a specification in which the 1 bet switch 33a is not provided and only the 3 bet switch 33b is provided, the D4 bit of the input port 0 is "unused".

  According to FIG. 9, in the input port 2, the signal of the reel sensor 41 for the left reel 39a (the left reel sensor signal) is input to the D0 bit, and the signal of the reel sensor 41 for the middle reel 39b (the middle reel) is input to the D1 bit. The sensor signal) is input, and the signal of the reel sensor 41 for the right reel 39c (right reel sensor signal) is input to the D2 bit. The signal of the payout sensor 52b (payout sensor 2 signal) is input to the D3 bit, and the signal of the payout sensor 52a (payout sensor 1 signal) is input to the D4 bit. Similarly, the signal from the closing sensor 30b (the closing sensor 2 signal) is input to the D5 bit, and the signal from the closing sensor 30a (the closing sensor 1 signal) is input to the D6 bit. Further, a signal from a passage sensor 28 provided in the game medal selector 27 (selector passage sensor signal) is input to the D7 bit.

  Here, as will be described later in detail, in the slot machine 10, as information processing executed by the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) for advancing a game, a main process (M_MAIN) (main) executed once per game (Also called a loop) is provided. In the main processing, detection of inserted game medals, winning processing after all reels 39 are stopped, and the like are performed.

  Then, as will be described later in detail, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) temporarily exits (interrupts the main processing) the main processing when executing the main processing, and interrupt processing (I_INTR) (timer interrupt processing). ) Is executed. In this interrupt process, an input port read process (step S65 in FIG. 55) for detecting the input ports 0 to 2 is executed, and after the execution, a process for returning to the main process is periodically performed. In the present embodiment, as an example, the execution interval of interrupt processing is set to "2.235 ms". That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired every time interrupt processing is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms.

  Then, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65), based on the data of the input ports 0 to 2 obtained as described above, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, the level data (each bit ON (1) / OFF (data indicating 0)), input port rising data (data indicating which bit is the data turned off at the previous interrupt and turned on at this interrupt), and the falling data at the input port ( Data indicating which bit is the data that was on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of this interrupt) is generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 63. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms of the interrupt cycle. Specific examples of the storage destination of the RWM 63 will be shown later (FIGS. 11 to 16).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 60 detects all of the D0 bit to the D7 bit of the input ports 0 to 2 regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, before the stop switch 35 during the rotation of the reel 39 is operated, it is meaningless to operate the bet switch 33 (it does not affect the game), so that the 3 bet switch signal or the 1 bet is not always required. Although it is not necessary to acquire the data of the switch signal, the data of the signal based on the operation of the bet switch 33 is acquired regardless of the situation. By doing so, since data of all bits can be acquired, for example, it is possible to know the on / off status of each operation switch.

  According to FIG. 10, the output port 3 outputs the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 40 of the left reel 39a from the D0 bit to the D3 bit. The motor 40 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 39 by 1-2 phase excitation, and drives the reel 39 by a combination of four-phase excitation of φ0 to φ3. The signal is output from a predetermined bit of the output port.

  The D4 bit and D5 bit of the output port 3 are unused. A signal from the blocker 29 (blocker signal) is output from the D6 bit, and a signal from the hopper motor 51 is output from the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal). Here, for example, when the blocker signal is “1 (ON)”, the blocker 29 forms a “permitted game medal passage” that connects the game medal insertion slot 26 and the hopper 50. On the other hand, when the blocker signal is “0 (OFF)”, the blocker 29 forms an “unauthorized game medal passage” that connects the game medal insertion slot 26 and the payout slot 53. Then, for example, when the blocker 29 is driven, the blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 3 by the interrupt processing.

  According to FIG. 10, the output port 4 outputs the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 40 of the middle reel 39b from the D0 bit to D3 bit, and the output port 5 outputs the φ0 to φ3 signal of the motor of the right reel 39c from the D0 bit to D3 bit. It outputs 40 φ0 to φ3 signals. These are similar to the D0 bit to D3 bit of the output port 3 described above.

  From the D5 bit to the D7 bit of the output port 4, the signal of each closing display LED of the status display LED 48 is output. Specifically, from the D5 bit, the signal of the three-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48g) (three-sheet insertion display LED signal) is output, and from the D6 bit, the two-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48f). The signal (two-sheet insertion display LED signal) is output, and the signal (one-sheet insertion display LED signal) of the one-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48e) is output from the D7 bit.

  The D4 bit of the output port and the D4 bit to D7 bit of the output port 5 are “unused”.

  According to FIG. 10, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external terminal board 100 is output from the D0 bit to the D6 bit of the output port 6. Specifically, in this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal payout signal, and a medal insertion signal are output.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, as an example, the external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door 2 is output from the D0 bit, and the external signal 4 indicating that an error or power interruption has occurred in the slot machine 10 is D1. Output from bit. Also, an external signal 3 indicating from the start to the end of AT (ART) is output from the D2 bit, an external signal 2 indicating continuation of AT (ART) is output from the D3 bit, and the activation of AT (ART) ( External signal 1 indicating "first hit" is output from the D4 bit. An external signal (medal payout signal) indicating the payout of the game medals is output from the D5 bit, and an external signal (medal insert signal) indicating the insertion of the game medals is output from the D6 bit.

  The external signal output from the output port 6 is not limited to the above, and an external signal indicating a specific game state (RT state, BB game state, etc.) may be output.

  The input port 61 and the output port 62 in the slot machine 10 have been described above. In the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores the data based on the input ports 0 to 2 and outputs the signal based on the stored control data to the output port during one interrupt process (within one interrupt). Output from 0-8.

[2-8. Stored data of RWM]
In this embodiment, a part of the addresses “F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” of the storage area of the RWM 63 is allocated to the used area, and the remaining storage area is allocated to the stack area or the unused area. . Therefore, in order to temporarily store the data (excluding the data in the stack area) used in the game, in the used area, the addresses to be the storage destination of each data are assigned in order from the address “F000 (H)”. ing. The amount of information that can be stored in one address is 1 byte.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the slot machine 10 may store a different program (generally referred to as a second program) outside the above-mentioned usage area of the RWM 63. In such a case, for example, , RWM63 addresses “F210 (H)” to “F3FF (H)” can be used together.

  11 to 16 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 6) showing storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. A specific example of data stored in the RWM 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. The data shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 is an example of the data used in the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 63 is not limited to these. Specifically, for example, there is an external signal output flag “_FL_INF_OUT” that stores a flag related to the output of an external signal.

  First, each data shown in FIG. 11 will be described.

  “_NB_BANK” of the address “F000” is a storage area for setting value data. As described above, in the present embodiment, the set value is set to “six stages” from setting 1 to setting 6 (for example, the higher the setting value, the more advantageous to the player). Then, in the case of setting 1, the set value data is set to “0”, and the set value data increases as the set value increases by 1. That is, the set value data in the case of setting 6 is “5”. Therefore, any value of "0" to "5" is stored in "_NB_BANK" as a normal value according to the current set value.

  Although details will be described later, when the setting value is changed by operating the setting change / reset switch 13, the setting value data is updated by the setting change process (see FIG. 28 described later) performed by the main control board 60. (Step S115 of FIG. 28) is performed. The display of the set value display LED 66 (digit 5) is performed with reference to the set value data.

  “_PT_IN0_OLD” of the address “F008” is a storage area for input port 0 level data. The input signal from the input port 0 is read for each interrupt processing, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN0_OLD” is updated based on the operation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN0_UP” of the address “F009” is a storage area for the input port 0 rising data. The rising data of the input port 0 is calculated by the main control board 60 every time the above-mentioned input port 0 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 12 will be described.

  “_PT_IN1_OLD” of the address “F00A” is a storage area for input port 1 level data. The input signal from the input port 1 is read for each interrupt processing, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN1_OLD” is updated based on the operation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN1_UP” of the address “F00B” is a storage area for the input port 1 rising data. The rising data of the input port 1 is calculated by the main control board 60 each time the above-mentioned input port 1 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 13 will be described.

  “_PT_IN2_OLD” of the address “F00C” is a storage area for input port 2 level data. The input signal from the input port 2 is read for each interrupt processing, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN2_OLD” is updated based on the operation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN2_UP” of the address “F00D” is a storage area for input port 2 rising data. The rising data of the input port 2 is calculated by the main control board 60 each time the above-mentioned input port 2 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 14 will be described.

  “_FL_SUB_INF2” of the address “F013” is the data storage area of the “sub notification flag 2”. In the "sub-notification flag 2", information regarding the occurrence of a predetermined error is stored in addition to the acceptance states of some operation switches. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, whether or not the operation of each stop button (stop switch 35) can be accepted is stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the sub notification flag 2, and the D3 bit is stored in the D3 bit. It is stored whether or not the operation to the three-sheet insertion button (three bet switch 33b) can be accepted. Further, the presence or absence of detection of a predetermined error (CH error, C0 error, H0 error in order) is stored in bits D4 to D6 of sub notification flag 2.

  “_CT_SEN_CHK” of the address “F016” is a data storage area of the closing monitoring counter. The throw-in monitoring counter is a counter for monitoring passage abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 of the game medal selector 27, and has a value of "0" to "255".

  Although the details will be described later, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is initialized when the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) module is executed (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is incremented by “1” when the D7-bit selector passage sensor signal is “1 (ON)” in the input port 2 rising data (“_PT_IN2_UP” of the address “F00D”) ( Step S612 in FIG. 57). Then, when the game medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) module accompanying the insertion of the game medal is executed, when it is determined that the game medal has normally passed, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is subtracted by “1” (see FIG. 45). Step S350). In other words, “_CT_SEN_CHK” has a value of “+1” when a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and has a value of “−1” when a game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 30, so that the normal state is achieved. It is a counter that repeats "+1" and "0". In the care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK), the subtracted result is compared with "3", and if no carry (carry down) occurs, it is determined to be abnormal (step S348 in FIG. 18A, FIG. 45). Step S351).

  “_NB_CREDIT_LED” of the address “F01C” is a storage area for the stored number display data. The stored sheet number display data is data stored to display the stored sheet number at the present time on the stored sheet number display LED 47.

  Here, in the present embodiment, although the data itself stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is a hexadecimal number (H), a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the number of stored sheets to be displayed on the stored number display LED 47 is “29”, “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stores “29 (H)”. In other words, "00101001 (B)" is stored in the address "F01C". At this time, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are used to display the lower digit (here, “9”) of the number of stored sheets, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are the upper digit of the stored number (here, “9”). 2 "). Then, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of stored sheets is “50”, so the data value stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  In the present embodiment, the RWM 63 is not provided with an address for storing the stored sheet number data itself, and is provided with the stored sheet number display data described above as the display data of the stored sheet number display LED 47. However, the stored sheet number display data is substantially the stored sheet number data itself.

  "_FL_MEDAL_STS" of the address "F01E" is a data storage area of the game medal management flag. The game medal management flag is a flag mainly for controlling turning on / off of the status display LED 48.

  In the game medal management flag, the D0 bit start switch acceptance state indicates the acceptance state of the start switch 34 (start lever), and when the operation to the start switch 34 is acceptable (for example, betting up to a specified number of game medals). It becomes "1" in the state before the game starts) and is set to "0" when the operation to the start switch 34 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 39 is rotating). Based on the data value stored in the D0 bit, turning on / off of the game start LED (state display LED 48d) is controlled.

  In the game medal management flag, the blocker state of the D2 bit indicates the state of the blocker 29, becomes "1" when the blocker 29 is in the ON state (permitted position), and is in the OFF state (non-permitted position). When it becomes "0". Since the state of the current blocker 29 can be determined by the value of the D2 bit, an insertable display LED (state display LED 48b) indicating whether or not the game medal can be inserted is based on this value. The on / off of is controlled.

  In the game medal management flag, the D3-bit replay display LED is a flag for controlling the turning on / off of the replay display LED (status display LED 48a) that is turned on when the replay is won. The D3 bit is set to "1" when a replay is displayed and a game medal is automatically inserted as a replay (step S241 in Fig. 37), and is set to "0" when the replay is finished ( 34, step S49). The status display LED 48a is turned on when the D3 bit is "1" and is turned off when the D3 bit is "0".

  In the game medal management flag, the D4 bit settlement display LED is set to "1" when the settlement switch 36 is operated to settle the bet medals and / or the stored medals, and "0" when the settled medals are settled. It is the data to be set. When the D4 bit is "1", the payment display LED (status display LED 48c) is turned on, and when the D4 bit is "0", the payment display LED (status display LED 48c) is turned off.

  In the game medal management flag, the D6 bit setting unchangeable flag is set to "0" when the setting can be changed (OFF), and is set to "1" when the setting cannot be changed (ON). Is the data. In this embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated and the game is advanced, the value is set to "1" (step S493 in FIG. 53), and when the acceptance of the game medal for the next game is started, the value is "0". (Step S233 in FIG. 37).

  When the setting change is to be performed in the slot machine 10, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the value is "1", the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change impossible flag is "1", when it is judged that the error cannot be recovered (for example, the abnormality related to the update of the random number judged for each interrupt processing), the setting change is permitted, and the setting change is made based on the setting change. It is said that the non-recoverable error can be canceled by using this. In this embodiment, the period (state) in which the setting cannot be changed is provided, but the setting may be changed at any time. In that case, it is not necessary to provide the setting unchangeable flag.

  In the game medal management flag, the D7-bit game medal limit determination is set to "1" when the number of betted game medals reaches a predetermined medal limit number (specified number), and "1" when the number is not reached. This is data set to "0".

  The main control board 60, for example, when one game medal is inserted and the game medal limit determination is “0”, the process of adding the game medal to the bet (adding one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC)) If the game medal limit determination is “1”, the process of adding the game medal to the credit (reservation) (addition of one stored coin (M_CREDIT_ADD)) is executed. In this way, by using the game medal limit determination flag, the main control board 60 determines which of the above processes is to be executed without referring to the bet number each time to calculate whether or not the prescribed number can be reached. Since it can be determined, the overall processing load can be reduced.

  “_FL_ACTION” of the address “F01F” is a data storage area of the operation state flag. As for the operating state flag, replay (replay) is assigned to D0 bit, 1 type BB is assigned to D3 bit, and RB is assigned to D4 bit. For example, when a replay is won, the replay game is activated, and when this game state is set (step S214 in FIG. 35), the D0 bit is set to "1". Then, when the game by the re-game is finished (step S49 in FIG. 34), the D0 bit is changed from "1" to "0". Similarly, for the D3 bit and the D4 bit, "1" or "0" is stored according to the operating state. The "unused" bit of the operating state flag can be appropriately assigned when a bonus or the like (for example, two types BB or CB) not provided in the present embodiment is added.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 15 will be described. Each of the data shown in FIG. 15 is data used as a timer, and the timer value of each timer is stored in a continuous storage area of addresses “F021” to “F02D”. In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer (also referred to as a 1-byte timer group and a 1-byte timer storage area) in which a timer value (1-byte timer value) is stored in a 1-byte storage area and a 2-byte storage area A 2-byte timer (2-byte timer group, also referred to as 2-byte timer storage area) for storing a timer value (2-byte timer value) is provided. Note that this is merely an example, and a timer (for example, a 3-byte timer) in which a timer value is stored in a storage area of 3 bytes or more may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, each of the above timer values is decremented by "1" every time one interrupt process is performed (every one interrupt). As will be described later in detail, the interrupt process (I_INTR) (see FIG. 55) is a process that is executed at a period of 2.235 ms during execution of the main process (M_MAIN) (see FIG. 34). By executing the module of measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) (see FIG. 56), each timer value is subtracted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the plurality of 1-byte timers and the plurality of 2-byte timers are configured to be stored in continuous storage areas, respectively, and the 1-byte timer group And a 2-byte timer group are stored in a continuous storage area. Specifically, seven 1-byte timers are stored at addresses “F021” to “F027”, and three 2-byte timers are stored at addresses “F028” to “F02D”.

  In the present embodiment, when storing a 2-byte timer value, the lower digit of the timer value is stored in a small address (upper address) and the upper digit of the timer value is stored in a larger address (lower address). Although described below, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower digit may be stored in the lower address and the upper digit may be stored in the upper address.

  In the present embodiment, by arranging a plurality of timers (timer values) at consecutive addresses in this way, the processing load of the processing of updating (subtracting here) each timer value in timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) is reduced. You can Details will be described later in the description of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT).

  Each timer shown in FIG. 15 will be described.

  The "_TM1_OUT_CNT" of the address "F021" is a timer storage area for the external signal output time, and stores the timer value of the 1-byte timer for measuring the output time of the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal. The initial value of "_TM1_OUT_CNT" is set to "46", and the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. When it is determined that the timer value becomes "0", "46" is set again, and the count of subtracting "1" for each interrupt is continued.

  "_TM1_STOP" of the address "F022" is a timer storage area of the rotation stop reception waiting time, which is the next stop button (stop switch 35a) after the operation of one stop button (stop switches 35a to 35c) is accepted. Stores the timer value of the 1-byte timer for measuring the waiting time until the operation to 35c) is received. In this embodiment, when it is confirmed that one stop button has been operated, the initial value "7" is set in "_TM1_STOP", and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, and the timer value is "0". Then, the operation to the next stop button can be accepted. Then, when the operation to the next stop button is accepted, the timer value of "_TM1_STOP" is set to the initial value "7" again, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.

  "_TM1_PAY" of the address "F023" is a timer storage area for the payout sensor check time, and a timer value of a 1-byte timer for monitoring the payout detection after the driving of the hopper motor 51 is stopped and detecting a game medal jam. Is memorized. In this embodiment, in step S420 of FIG. 48 described later, the initial value "46" is set to the timer value of "_TM1_PAY", and "1" is subtracted from each interrupt.

  “_TM1_COND_OUT” of the address “F024” is a timer storage area for the condition device output time, and the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and accessory condition device information) to be output as a test signal. The timer value of the 1-byte timer for measuring the “condition device output time” corresponding to is stored. In the present embodiment, after the minimum game time (see “_TM2_GAME” described later) has elapsed, the timer value of “_TM1_COND_OUT” is set to “49”, and “1” is subtracted from each interrupt. In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, 107.28 ms (2.235 ms × 48 = 107.280 ms) are counted by 48 interrupts, and this 107.28 ms is the condition device. This is the signal output time. More specifically, the winning and replay condition device information is output in the first-half interrupts 1 to 24, and the accessory condition device information is output in the second-half interrupts 25 to 48.

  "_TM1_CH_CHK" of the address "F025" is a timer storage area for the selector passage retention time, and stores a timer value of a 1-byte timer for detecting an abnormal passage of the passage sensor 28 (clogging of game medals). In the present embodiment, when the abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 is started, the initial value "200" is set to the timer value of "_TM1_CH_CHK", and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. When the passage value is detected by the passage sensor 28 when the timer value becomes "0", an error occurs.

  “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” of the address “F026” is a timer storage area for the blocker OFF time monitoring time, and is 1 for monitoring the waiting time for preventing the “blocking of game medals” by the blocker 29 of the game medal selector 27. The timer value of the byte timer is stored. More specifically, the blocker OFF monitoring time is a timer for measuring the waiting time until the blocker 29 is changed from the OFF state (non-permission position) to the ON state (permission position). Specifically, the timer value of “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” is set to the initial value “144” at the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal (when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising edge data “_PT_IN2_UP” becomes “1”). It is set and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. The control for changing the blocker 29 from OFF to ON is not permitted until the timer value becomes “0”.

  In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt process is set to 2.235 ms, about 322 ms (2.235 ms × 144 = 321.840 ms) due to 144 interrupts is the blocker OFF monitoring time. In the present embodiment, the blocker OFF monitoring time is a time sufficient for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, It is assumed that a sufficient time is set until the flow reaches the hopper 50 beyond the position of the blocker 29 to reach a predetermined position), and the 144 interrupt (about 322 ms) described above is an example thereof.

  "_TM1_BLON_CHK" of the address "F027" is a timer storage area for the blocker ON monitoring time, and is 1 for monitoring the standby time for preventing "swallowing of game medals" by the blocker 29 of the game medal selector 27. The timer value of the byte timer is stored. More specifically, the blocker ON monitoring time is a timer for measuring the waiting time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position).

  Specifically, the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has an initial value of “45” when the selector passage sensor signal rises (when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rise data “_PT_IN2_UP” becomes “1”). It is set and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. The control for changing the blocker 29 from ON to OFF is not permitted until the timer value becomes “0”.

  In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, about 101 ms (2.235 ms × 48 = 100.575 ms) due to 45 interrupts becomes the blocker ON monitoring time. In the present embodiment, the blocker ON monitoring time is a time sufficient for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, It is assumed that a sufficient time is set until the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b) passes through the blocker 29 and is detected, and the 45 interrupts (about 101 ms) described above is an example thereof. In other words, the time difference between the initial value "45" and the final value "0" of the blocker ON-time monitoring time is that the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 becomes the insertion sensor 30 (30a, 30b). It is set longer than the time required for detection.

  "_TM2_HE_CHK" of the addresses "F028" and "F029" is a timer storage area for the game medal payout device control time, and stores a timer value of a 2-byte timer for measuring the control time of the game medal payout device 49. It Specifically, when the game medal payout device 49 starts to settle and pay out the game medals, the timer value of “_TM2_HE_CHK” is the initial value “2686” (in the data, the value of the lower address “F029” is At "00001010", the value of the upper address "F028" is set to "01111110"), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, until the timer value becomes “0”, the game medal payout device 49 cannot start the settlement and payout of the next game medal. In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt process is set to 2.235 ms, specifically, the game medal payout device control time is “about 6 seconds” (2.235 ms × 2686≈6000 ms). .

  “_TM2_BACK_OFF” of the addresses “F02A” and “F02B” is a timer storage area for the game standby display start time, and the timer value of the 2-byte timer for measuring the standby time for performing the game standby display is stored. It Specifically, at the start of module execution of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) (in other words, after the game ends), the timer value of "_TM2_BACK_OFF" is set to the initial value "26846" (the lower address "F02B is on the data"). Is set to "01101000" and the value of the upper address "F02A" is set to "11011110") (step S211 in FIG. 35). After that, the timer value of the 2-byte timer is decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing. Then, when the timer value becomes "0", "game medal payout amount data" _NB_PAY_MEDAL "for displaying the payout number of the game medals on the acquired number display LED 47 during the execution of the medal insertion waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP) module. (Not shown) "is cleared (step S292 in FIG. 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the execution period of the interrupt process is set to 2.235 ms, the time required for the timer value to become “0” is about 60 seconds (2.235 ms ×). 26846 ≈ 60000 ms = 60 seconds). That is, in this embodiment, when the game is not played for a predetermined time (about 60 seconds), a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. For example, when the payout amount of "9" is paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 changes from "09" or "* 9" indicating the payout amount to "00", "* 0", or by clear processing. It becomes "**" ("*" means off). As a result, even if the player operates the settlement switch to stop the game after the payout of “9”, the information indicating that the “9” has been paid out (“09” or “*”). 9 ") is changed by the display clearing process after about 60 seconds. With such a configuration, when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, it is possible to notify the other players and persons involved in the hall that the game is completely finished.

  However, even in such a case, the display of the replay display LED (state display LED 48a), the stored number display LED 45, and the insertion display LED (state display LED 48e to state display LED 48g) is configured not to be cleared. As a result, even if the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared by the game standby display, the information regarding the continuation of the game continues to be displayed. Therefore, even when the player leaves the seat once, another player or a person related to the hall. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is completely finished, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  "_TM2_GAME" of the addresses "F02C" and "F02D" is a timer storage area for the minimum game time, and the timer value of a 2-byte timer for monitoring the minimum game time for one time is stored. The timer value is stored, for example, at a predetermined timing before a predetermined process for rotating the reel 39 (all reels) is executed. "_TM2_GAME" is set to "1836" as an initial value (in the data, the value of the lower address "F02D" is "00000111" and the value of the upper address "F02C" is "00101100"), and one interrupt is generated. "1" is subtracted for each. In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, the minimum game time of the present embodiment is "4" depending on the value obtained by multiplying the execution value of the interrupt processing by the initial value of "_TM2_GAME". .1 second ”(2.235 ms × 1836≈4100 ms).

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 16 will be described.

  “_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F048” is a data storage area of winning and replay condition device numbers. The condition device number may be referred to as winning information or the like. When the winning combination is determined by performing the winning lottery, the value corresponding to the winning combination is stored in the storage area. In the present embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers are set to "0" to "39" (see FIG. 24 and FIG. 25A), so that "_NB_CND_NOR" is any of "0" to "39". Is stored. The value stored in the storage area is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 39, AT lottery (addition in AT), effect lottery by the sub-control board 80, and the like.

  "_NB_CND_BNS" of the address "F049" is a data storage area of the accessory condition device number. In the present embodiment, since one type 1 BB is set as the accessory condition device (see FIG. 25B), “_NB_CND_BNS” is set to “0 (non-win) according to whether or not the type 1 BB is won. Or “1 (win)” is stored. Like the value of “_NB_CND_NOR”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 39, AT lottery (addition in AT), and effect lottery by the sub-control board 80. Used.

  In addition, when a plurality of special winning combinations (for example, one type 1 BB and one type 2 BB) are provided, “_NB_CND_BNS” is set to 10 based on the winning accessory role condition device number. When expressed in a decimal number, any of "0" to "2" is stored. In addition, when a plurality of special roles (for example, 1 type BB (1), 1 type BB (2), 2 types BB (1), 2 types BB (2)) are provided, "_NB_CND_BNS" is set. Similarly, any one of "0" to "4" is stored in decimal notation.

  Also, if the winning number of the special role is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", when the winning information is carried over without displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special role (inside game), "_NB_CND_BNS" The memory of the winning number in “” is maintained.

  The “_PT_MEDAL_LED” of the address “F060” is a storage area for the number-of-insertion display LED signal data. The thrown-in number display LED signal data is data for controlling the turning on / off of the thrown-in display LED, and each of the D5 bit to the D7 bit has three to one throw-in display LED (state display LED 48g, state display LED 48f, A status display LED 48e) is assigned. For example, when only the D7 bit is "1", it is controlled so that only the single-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48e) is turned on. Further, for example, when the D7 bit and the D6 bit are “1” and the D5 bit is “0”, the one-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48e) and the two-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48f) are turned on. Controlled.

  "_PT_BLK_HPM" of the address "F061" is a data storage area of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal, and the D6 bit is used as the blocker signal and the D7 bit is used as the hopper motor drive signal. When the blocker 29 is turned on (permitted position), the D6 bit is set to "1", and when the blocker 29 is turned off (non-permitted position), the D6 bit is set to "0". More specifically, the “_PT_BLK_HPM” of the address “F061” is updated in the main process (FIG. 34), and the data of the output port 3 (see FIG. 10) is updated based on the data of the address in the interrupt process (FIG. 55). Is generated. As a result, the main control board 60 controls the operation of the blocker 29. The hopper motor drive signal for controlling the drive of the hopper motor 51 is also similar to the blocker signal. When the hopper motor 51 is driven, the D7 bit is set to "1", and when the hopper motor 51 is not driven, the D7 bit is driven. The bit is set to "0".

  "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06D" is a storage area of the game medal number data. In the game medal number data, the number of betting game medals (the number of bets) is stored, and in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of bets is three, so any one of “0” to “3” is set. Remembered.

  “_CT_MEDAL_IN” of the address “F06F” is a data storage area for the number of times the medal insertion signal is output, and values “0” to “6” are stored. The medal insertion signal output number indicates the number of times the bet number of the game medal is output as a signal, and the number of times the bet number is doubled is output. In this embodiment, the maximum bet number is "3", and the maximum medal insertion signal output count is "6". At this time, the specific output of the external signal is as "on (first time)", "off (second time)", "on (third time)", ..., "off (sixth time)". , ON and OFF are repeated until the total number of outputs is reached.

  “_CT_MEDAL_OUT” of the address “F070” is a data storage area for the number of times the medal payout signal is output, and in the present embodiment, values of “0” to “20” are stored. The medal payout signal output count indicates the number of times the payout number of game medals is output to the outside, and the number of times the payout number is doubled is output. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of paid-out game medals associated with winning is “10” (eg, winning 20 of FIG. 22), so the maximum value of the medal payout signal output count is “20”. For example, when the maximum value of the payout number of game medals is set to "15", the maximum value of the medal payout signal output times is "30".

[2-9. Sub control board]
The sub-control board 80 shown in FIG. 4 controls effects and the like during a game and a game standby.

  The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 60 (particularly the control command transmitting means 78) informs the sub control board 80 of information (control) required for output of the effect. Command) is transmitted by one-way parallel communication. The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, in either case of electrical connection or optical communication connection, it is not limited to parallel communication, serial communication may be used, or both communication may be used together.

  Further, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 60. Each of these components is mounted in the MPU on the sub control board 80. Further, in addition to the RWM built in the MPU, the RWM (external RWM) is also mounted outside the MPU (however, on the sub control board 80). Hereinafter, the RWM 83 is meant to include the RWM built in the MPU and the external RWM. Note that FIG. 4 is merely an example, and the configuration of the sub control board 80 is not limited to this.

  The input port 81 is a connection through which signals to the sub CPU 85 are input from the control command transmitting means 78 of the main control board 60 and peripheral devices for production (for example, various operation switches such as the cross key 22 and the production button 24). It is a department. Further, the output port 82 is a connection unit from which a signal is output from the sub CPU 85 to peripheral devices for production (for example, the speaker 20 and the image display device 21). That is, the sub control board 80 (sub CPU 85) and these peripheral devices for effect are electrically connected via the input port 81 and the output port 82.

  The RWM 83 is a storage device (also referred to as “storage unit”) capable of reading and writing data, and various data (for example, an image) necessary for the sub CPU 85 (sub control board 80) to control effects and the like. Parameters regarding display of the effect screen on the display device 21 are stored.

  The ROM 84 is a read-only storage device (also referred to as “storage unit”), and is a program and various data (for example, production data) necessary for the sub CPU 85 (sub control board 80) to control production and the like. Or a data table for performing a lottery related to the production).

  The sub CPU 85 refers to a CPU mounted on the sub control board 80, and controls effects and the like according to a program stored in the ROM 84 (for example, determines an effect screen to be displayed on the image display device 21).

  In the sub-control board 80, effects and the like are controlled by the operation of the sub CPU 85 (may be regarded as MPU), and effect control means 87 for controlling execution of effects and the like is realized.

  The effect control means 87 is based on a control command (specifically, for example, an RT number, a pressing order instruction number, an effect group number, an accessory condition device number, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 60 by the control command transmission means 78. And at what timing (for example, when the start switch 34 is operated or when each stop switch 35 is operated) according to the winning combination, the game state, and the like, what kind of performance is output by the peripheral device for performance? (For example, how to turn on, blink, or turn off the effect lamp 19, what sound is output from the speaker 20, what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 21, etc.) by lottery decide.

  Then, the effect control unit 87 controls the output of the peripheral devices for effect (effect lamp 19, speaker 20, and image display device 21) according to the above determination. Furthermore, the effect control means 87 informs the pressing order of the stop switch 34 during the type 1 BB game or AT (ART), and displays the acquired number of games, the number of remaining games, etc. as an image.

  Peripheral devices for performance connected to the sub control board 80 will be described.

  The effect lamp 19 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 19 includes a back lamp arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 39, a fluorescent lamp for illuminating a symbol on the reel 39 from the upper portion of the reel 39, and a front surface of the front door 2 of the slot machine 10. A frame lamp that is arranged and blinks at a predetermined timing is included. Among them, the back lamp of the reel 39 illuminates the symbol displayed on the reel 39 from behind, thereby enhancing the visibility of the symbols on the reel 39 (the upper, middle, and lower symbols) seen from the display window 17.

  The speaker 20 outputs a predetermined sound along with execution of various effects during a game or a game standby.

  The image display device 21 displays various effect images and the like during the game (for example, the correct answer pressing order and the effect corresponding to the lottery result of the winning combination), game information and the like (for example, the number of games played during the accessory operation and AT, This is a display device that displays the number of acquired sheets, etc. The image display device 21 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, or the like. It should be noted that the display by the image display device 21 is not limited to the display during the game, and the display during the game standby is also possible.

  The cross key 22 and the menu button 23 are used when displaying information intended by the player (for example, a two-dimensional code including the game history of the player) (e.g., corresponding to the operation of the "menu screen", which will be described in detail later). , Used when the hall manager changes various settings.

[3. Specific configuration of main control board]
A specific configuration of the main control board 60 in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 10, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) controls the game played by the player.

  Here, first, an outline of one game will be described. When the 3 bet switch 33b is operated in the state where no game medals have been bet, a signal indicating that the 3 bet switch 33b has been operated is input to the main CPU 65, and the main CPU 65 plays the 3 game medals. Bet. When the start switch 34 is operated while three (specified number) of game medals are bet, a signal indicating that the start switch 34 has been operated is input to the main CPU 65, and the main CPU 65 (role lottery means 69). ) Performs a lottery, and the main CPU 65 (reel control means 70) drives the motor 40. That is, the main CPU 65 (reel control means 70) rotates all reels 39.

  When, for example, the left stop switch 35a is operated while all reels 39 are rotating, a signal indicating that the left stop switch 35a has been operated is input to the main CPU 65, and the main CPU 65 (reel control means 70 ) Drives the motor 40. That is, the rotation of the left reel 39a corresponding to the left stop switch 35a is stopped.

  In a state in which the rotation of all reels 39 is stopped, the main CPU 65 (display determination means 71) determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination. Is determined (display determination / winning determination). Then, for example, when the main CPU 65 (display determination means 71) determines that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination, the main CPU 65 (payout means 72) outputs the game medal. Pay out.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 60 is realized by the operation of the main CPU 65. The combination lottery means 69, the reel control means 70, the display determination means 71, the payout means 72, the RT control means 75, and the external signal transmission. Means 77 and control command transmission means 78 are provided. In the following, the arrangement of symbols in the present embodiment, the winning combination, the combination of symbols and the like will be described, and then each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 60 will be described.

  It should be noted that the respective means of the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 4 are merely examples in the present embodiment, and the main control board 60 is pushed by other means that performs another operation (for example, based on the result of the role lottery). A pushing order instruction number selecting means for selecting an order instruction number, an effect group number selecting means for selecting an effect group number corresponding to a result of the winning combination lottery, etc. may be provided.

[3-1. Arrangement of symbols, winning combinations, combinations of symbols, etc.]
First, an arrangement of symbols, a winning combination, a combination of symbols and the like in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 17A shows an arrangement of symbols on each reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c). In addition, in FIG. 17B, each symbol and the name of each symbol are summarized. Note that, in FIG. 17A, symbol numbers (symbol numbers) are also shown for convenience of description. Incidentally, “blank” in FIG. 17 does not mean that no design is printed, but a blank design is printed.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the reel tape attached to each reel 39 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined pattern is printed for each frame. Specifically, 20 symbols (symbol numbers “0” to “19”) are printed on each reel tape.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the display of symbols when the reels are stopped. FIG. 18 (A) is a diagram for explaining the display position of the symbol, and FIG. 18 (B) is a diagram for explaining the activated line.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (A), a display window 17 is provided in the front door 2, and nine symbols (three consecutive symbols on each reel 39) can be seen from the display window 17. Has become. At this time, the display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the left reel 39a, which can be seen from the display window 17, are called "upper left row", "left middle row", "lower left row" in order from the top, and the middle reel 39b. The respective display positions of the three consecutive symbols in are referred to as “middle upper stage”, “middle middle stage”, and “middle lower stage” in order from the top, and the respective display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the right reel 39c. Are referred to as "upper right tier", "right middle tier", and "lower right tier" in order from the top.

  FIG. 18B shows an example of a state in which the rotation of all reels 39 is stopped, and the effective line is indicated by a broken line.

  In the present embodiment, as a linear display line extending over the three reels 39a to 31c, a display line of an upper left stage-middle upper stage-upper right stage, a left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage, and a lower left stage- There are display lines of middle lower stage-lower right stage, display lines of upper left stage-middle middle stage-lower right stage, and display lines of lower left stage-middle middle stage-upper right stage. It should be noted that there may be a non-linear display line (for example, a display line of upper left stage-middle middle stage-upper right stage).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, the upper left-middle middle-lower right display lines are set as valid lines, and all other display lines are set as "invalid lines". The display line set as the effective line is not limited to the display line of the upper left tier-middle middle tier-lower right tier, and other display lines (for example, the upper left tier-middle upper tier-upper right tier). It may be set to the effective line. Further, a plurality of display lines (for example, upper left-middle upper-upper right display line and upper left-middle middle-lower right display line) may be set as effective lines.

  In the case of FIG. 18B, "blue seven-blue seven-blue seven" is displayed on the activated line. That is, the main control board 60 (display determination means 71 described later) determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB is displayed on the activated line (see FIG. 19).

  19 to 23 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 5) for explaining a combination of symbols. 19 to 23, a combination of symbols, a condition device, and a privilege given when the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line are summarized. In addition, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 23, the numbers of symbol combinations are also shown for convenience of description. In addition, in FIG. 23, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, the combination of symbols (“Pattern 01 (the number of symbols“ 85 ”to“ 88 of the combination of symbols ”displayed when the winning combination is lost) is displayed. ")" And "Pattern 02 (symbol combination numbers" 89 "to" 92 ")" are also shown.

  As described above, the condition device is roughly classified into a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, a condition device related to the re-play, and a condition device related to the winning.

  The combination of the symbols shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 and the condition device corresponding to the combination of the symbols will be described.

  The symbol combination number “1” shown in FIG. 19 is a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device. In the present embodiment, as the condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, there is provided one condition device (the first type BB) related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, you may have SB, RB, CB, and two kinds BB as a condition apparatus regarding the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st class BB is displayed on the activated line, the 1st class BB (the accessory continuous operation device relating to the 1st class special accessory) and the RB (1st class special accessory) are activated. . In other words, the normal game (non-RT, any of RT1 to RT4) shifts to the 1st class BB game (1st class BB operation (RB operation)). During the 1st class BB game, the payout rate is designed to exceed "1". That is, the type 1 BB game is an advantageous game for the player, who can expect to win more game medals than the normal game.

  The numbers "2" to "31" of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 are symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device related to the re-game. In this embodiment, as the condition device related to the re-game, there are 11 condition devices related to the re-game (re-game 01 to re-game 11).

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 to the re-game 11 is displayed on the activated line, the game medal is automatically bet. In other words, a replay game can be performed (replay). Therefore, “replay 01 to replay 11” are also referred to as “replay”.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, RT may shift. Specifically, in RT1 and RT2, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, it shifts to non-RT. Therefore, "replay 01" is also called "RT transition replay". When the non-RT is an RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than RT1 or RT2, "replay 01" is also referred to as "demotion replay". However, in RT4, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, it does not shift to non-RT.

  Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 04 is displayed on the activated line, RT shifts. Specifically, at RT1, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay game 04 is displayed on the activated line, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, "replay 04" is also called "RT transition replay". When RT2 is a more advantageous RT for the player than RT1, "replay 04" is also referred to as "promotion replay".

  The symbol combination numbers “32” to “84” shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 are symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices related to winning. In the present embodiment, there are 23 winning condition devices (winning prize 01 to winning prize 23) as winning condition devices.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, nine game medals are paid out. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the invalid line (display line of left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage). Therefore, “winning prize 01” is also called “bell”.

  As will be described later, in the game in which the push order bell (winning group A, winning group B) is won, winning 01 is activated. The combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is "PB = 1". That is, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (winning group A, winning group B) is won, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct pushing order, the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is obtained. It is always displayed on the activated line and 9 game medals are paid out.

  Further, in the game in which the common bell (winning C) is won, only winning 01 is activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is "PB = 1". That is, in the present embodiment, when the common bell (winning prize C) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning prize 01 is always displayed on the activated line, and nine game medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 02 to winning 09, winning 15 and winning 16 is displayed on the activated line, one game medal is paid out.

  As will be described later, in the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A1) is won, winning prize 02, winning prize 04, winning prize 07, and winning prize 09 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A2) is won, winning prize 03, winning prize 05, winning prize 06, and winning prize 08 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A3) is won, winning prize 02, winning prize 05, winning prize 06, and winning prize 09 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A4) is won, winning prize 03, winning prize 04, winning prize 07, and winning prize 08 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A5) is won, winning prize 02, winning prize 05, winning prize 07, and winning prize 08 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize A6) is won, winning prize 03, winning prize 04, winning prize 06, and winning prize 09 are activated. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 02 to the winning 09 is "PB ≠ 1".

  Further, in the game in which the push order bell (winning prize B1) is won, winning prizes 02 to 09 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize B2) is won, winning prizes 02 to 09 and winning prize 15 are activated. In the game in which the push order bell (winning prize B3) is won, winning prizes 02 to 09 and winning prize 16 are activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 02 to winning 09 is "PB ≠ 1". Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 15 and the winning 16 is also “PB ≠ 1”.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 10 to winning 12 is displayed on the activated line, four game medals are paid out. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, “winning prize 10” is also called “oblique watermelon”. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 11 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the ineffective line (upper left-middle upper-upper right display line), and the winning 12 is obtained. When the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the ineffective line (left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). Therefore, the “winning prize 11 and winning prize 12” are also referred to as “parallel watermelons”. And "win 10 to win 12" are also called "watermelon".

  As will be described later, in the game in which the weak watermelon (prize D) is won, the prize 10 is activated. The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is “PB ≠ 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game in which a weak watermelon is won, by operating the stop switch 35, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, and four game medals are paid out.

  Further, in the game in which the strong watermelon (winning prize E) is won, the winning prizes 10 to 12 are activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is “PB ≠ 1”. Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 11 and the winning 12 is also “PB ≠ 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the strong watermelon is won, depending on the operation of the stop switch 35, any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the prizes 10 to 12 is displayed on the activated line, and the four game medals are displayed. Be paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 13 and winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, two game medals are paid out. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is displayed on the activated line, "cherry-cherry / red seven-cherry / omission" is displayed on the invalid line (left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). To be done. Therefore, "Prize 13" is also referred to as "middle cherry." When the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, "cherry / omission-cherry / red seven-omission" is displayed on the ineffective line (lower left stage-middle upper stage-upper right display line). To be done. Therefore, "winning prize 14" is also called "corner cherry". The “winning 13, winning 14” is also called “cherry”.

  As will be described later, in the game in which the weak cherry (winning prize F) is won, the winning prize 14 operates. The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 is "PB = 1". That is, in the present embodiment, when a weak cherry is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 is always displayed on the activated line, and two game medals are paid out.

  Also, in the game in which the strong cherry (winning prize H) is won, the winning prize 13 and the winning prize 14 are activated. The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is “PB ≠ 1”. However, as described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 is “PB = 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a strong cherry is won, any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 13 and the winning 14 is always displayed on the activated line, and two game medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the prizes 20 to 23 is displayed on the activated line, 10 game medals are paid out.

  As will be described later, in the game winning JAC1 (prize N), prizes 20 to 23 are activated. The combination of symbols corresponding to the prizes 20 to 23 is “PB = 1”. That is, when JAC1 is won, any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the prizes 20 to 23 is always displayed on the activated line, and 10 game medals are paid out.

  Also, in the game winning JAC2 (prize O), prize 21 and prize 23 are activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 21 and the winning prize 23 is “PB = 1”. That is, when JAC2 is won, any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 21 and the winning 23 is displayed on the activated line, and 10 game medals are paid out.

  Further, in the game winning JAC3 (Prize P), the prize 20 and the prize 22 are activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 20 and the winning 22 is "PB = 1". That is, when JAC3 is won, any combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 20 and the winning 22 is always displayed on the activated line, and 10 game medals are paid out.

  Also, in the game winning JAC4 (prize Q), prize 20 and prize 21 are activated. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 20 and the winning 21 is "PB = 1". That is, when JAC4 is won, any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 20 and the winning 21 is always displayed on the activated line, and 10 game medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to pattern 01 and pattern 02 is displayed on the activated line, RT may shift. Specifically, in non-RT, RT2, or RT3, when a combination of symbols corresponding to pattern 01 or pattern 02 is displayed on the activated line, the process proceeds to RT1. However, in RT4, even if a combination of symbols corresponding to pattern 01 or pattern 02 is displayed on the activated line, it does not shift to RT1.

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong push order, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the activated line. And the RT may shift.

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, when the winning combination is missed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is always displayed on the activated line. However, in the game in which the push order bell (prize A group) is won, even when the winning combination is dropped, the combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 may not be displayed on the activated line.

  One of the aforementioned condition devices, BB, does not end its operation unless the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in the activated line in the operated game. However, the re-game 01 to re-game 11 and the prize 01 to 23 are ended even if the corresponding combination of symbols is not displayed in the activated line in the operated game.

  As a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, if it has SB, RB, CB, or 2 type BB, RB or 2 type BB corresponds in the operated game. If the symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line, the operation does not end. However, SB or CB ends its operation even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line in the operated game.

[3-2. Role lottery means]
Next, the role lottery means 69 will be described. The role lottery means 69 performs a role lottery. The “result of lottery” is also referred to as the “result of lottery” or the “result of lottery”. In addition, "winning a lot (selecting a lot)" means selecting a win or determining a win. Therefore, the “role lottery means 69” is also referred to as the “role selection means 69” and the “role determination means 69”.

  The role lottery means 69 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. The determination means for determining whether or not the winning combination is won and the winning combination is provided.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, a total of 65536 random numbers from "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that a counter that counts once in 200 nanoseconds keeps counting in the range of “0” to “65535” as one cycle, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number generation means. Keeps counting random numbers.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined timing (when the player operates (turns on) the start switch 34 in the present embodiment). The determination means determines the winning combination corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with the winning combination lottery table (see FIG. 26).

  24 and 25 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining each winning combination. 24 and 25, the condition device number, the effect group number, the name of the winning combination, the common name of the winning combination, the operating condition device, and the presence or absence of the number of units for each RT are summarized. 24 and 25, a part of the winning combinations drawn by the slot machine 10 is omitted.

  The effect group numbers shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are numbers grouping the winning combinations to the extent that the type of winning combination can be discriminated. For example, by the unillustrated effect group number selecting module, the winning combination lottery means 69 is used. It is selected according to the result of the winning combination lottery, and is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the control command transmitting means 78. Although detailed description of the effect group number is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 without transmitting the winning and replay condition device numbers themselves related to the winning combination. Thus, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is possible to estimate the winning combination within a certain range (for example, in the range of winning group A or winning group B, etc.), and to correspond to the production group number. It is possible to select a performance and output it.

  As described above, the winning combination is a bonus (a condition device relating to a winning product or a winning device continuous actuation device), a replay (a condition device relating to a re-game works), and a small winning combination (a condition device relating to winning a prize). Works) and is roughly divided into.

  The "conditional device number" is a number for identifying the winning combination (conditional device that operates). That is, the "condition device number" shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A) is a "winning and re-playing condition device number", which is a winning small winning combination (a condition device related to the winning winning action) or winning. It is a number for specifying a replay (a replay condition device that operates). Further, the "conditional device number" shown in FIG. 25 (B) is a "feature condition device number", which is a winning bonus (a condition device relating to the operation of an accessory or an accessory continuous operation device). Is a number for identifying the.

  Then, “◯” in the “presence or absence of number” column means that there is a number in the combination lottery table (see FIG. 26). In other words, it means that the winning combination is a winning combination. In addition, "x" in the "presence or absence of number" column means that there is no number in the combination lottery table (see FIG. 26). In other words, it means a role that is not included in the lottery target.

  First, the bonus will be described.

  The accessory condition device number "1" shown in FIG. 25 (B) is a bonus. In the present embodiment, one bonus (one type BB) is provided as a bonus. That is, when the type 1 BB is won, the accessory condition device number is "1", and when the type 1 BB is not won, the accessory condition device number is "0". In addition, you may have SB, RB, CB, or 2 types of BB as a bonus.

  1st class BB (the accessory condition device number is "1"), a combination of symbols corresponding to 1st class BB is displayed on the activated line depending on the timing when the stop switch 35 is operated, and 1st class BB and RB are activated. To do. In other words, it shifts to the type 1 BB operation (the RB operation).

  In general, when the bonus is won, there are cases where the bonus is won independently, when the bonus is duplicated with the replay, and when the bonus is duplicated. In the present embodiment, when one kind of BB is won, when it is independently won (setting 2 to setting 6), and when it is repeatedly won with re-game E described later (setting 2 to setting 6), There is a case where the game is won in duplicate with a re-playing game F (setting 1 to setting 6) described later (see FIG. 26).

  Then, in general, when the player wins in duplicate with the replay or when the player wins with the small win, the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay and the small win is prioritized and displayed on the activated line in this game. The combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus in the current game may be preferentially displayed on the activated line. In the present embodiment, when the winning is repeated with the re-playing E, or when the winning is repeated with the re-playing F, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-playing E or the re-playing F is given priority in this game. It is displayed on the active line.

  Next, description will be made regarding loss, replay, and small win.

  The winning and re-playing condition device number “0” shown in FIG. 24 is a loss. That is, when the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the winning and re-playing condition device number is "0". Note that the accessory condition device number is not affected by the result of the winning of the winning lottery. That is, when the result of the role lottery is lost when the accessory condition device number is "0", the accessory condition device number remains "0" and the accessory condition device number is "1". If the result of the role lottery is lost at a certain time (for example, when the bonus winning information is carried over), the accessory condition device number remains “1”.

  The winning and replaying condition device numbers “1” to “15” (partly not shown) shown in FIG. 24 are replays. In the present embodiment, as replay, 15 replays (re-game A1 to re-game A6, re-game B1 to re-game B3, re-game C, re-game D (not shown), re-game E, re-game F, re-game. G (not shown), replay H (not shown)). The re-games A1 to A6 are also collectively referred to as "re-game A group", and the re-games B1 to B3 are collectively referred to as "re-game B group".

  Re-game A1 to re-game A6 (winning and re-playing condition device numbers “1” to “6”), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct push order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 04 is effective. It is displayed on the line and moves to RT2. Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, and the process shifts to non-RT. That is, the replay A1 to the replay A6 are replays in which the result of the obtained game is different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 35. Therefore, "replay A1 to replay A6" are also referred to as "push order replay". In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 04 is displayed on the activated line, and also when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, the game medals are automatically bet.

  Also, the correct answer order in the replay A1 is "left / middle / right", the correct answer order in the replay A2 is "left / right / middle", and the correct answer order in the replay A3 is "middle / left".・ Right ", the correct answer order in replay A4 is" middle / right / left ", the correct answer order in replay A5 is" right / left / middle ", and the correct answer order in replay A6 is "Right / middle / left" is set, and the probability that the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 04 is displayed on the activated line is "1/6" for each of the re-game A1 to the re-game A6. That is, the re-game A1 to the re-game A6 are 6-option push-order replays.

  Re-game B1 to re-game B3 (winning and re-game condition device numbers "7" to "9"), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct push order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 02 is effective. It is displayed on the line (RT does not shift). Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, and the process shifts to non-RT. That is, the replay B1 to the replay B3 are replays in which the result of the obtained game is different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 35. Therefore, "replay B1 to replay B3" are also called "push order replays". In addition, even when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is displayed on the activated line and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, the game medal is automatically bet.

  The correct answer order in the re-game B1 is "left first", the correct answer order in the re-game B2 is "middle first", the correct answer order in the re-game B3 is "right first", The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is displayed on the activated line is “1/3” for each of the re-game B1 to the re-game B3. That is, the re-game B1 to the re-game B3 are push-order replays of three choices.

  Re-game C (prize and re-game condition device number "10"), the combination of symbols corresponding to re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, whichever stop switch 35 is operated. That is, the re-play C is a re-play in which the result of the obtained game does not differ regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Therefore, "replay C" is also called "replay (normal replay)".

  Replay C is a replay that is a target of the lottery only in non-RT and RT4. Therefore, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, RT does not shift. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, the game medal is automatically bet.

  Re-game E (prize and re-game condition device number "12"), the combination of symbols corresponding to re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, whichever stop switch 35 is pressed. That is, the replay E is a replay in which the result of the game obtained does not change regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. However, as described above, there is a case where the replay game E is won in duplicate with the first type BB (setting 2 to setting 6). Therefore, “replay E” is also called “chance replay”. Further, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, RT does not shift. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, the game medal is automatically bet.

  Here, as described above, when the replay E is set to 2 or more, a part of the replay E is a double win with the first type BB (replay E + 1 type BB). More specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the role lottery table of setting 1, the number of “replay E + 1 type BB” is set to “0” and is not a lottery target. On the other hand, in the role lottery table of the settings 2 to 6, a predetermined value of "1" or more is set as the number of "replay E + 1 type BB", and there is a possibility of duplicate winning (see FIG. 26 for details). ). The predetermined value of the registered number in the role lottery table of the settings 2 to 6 may be the same value or different values in each setting. In this way, a situation in which the winning probability (including lottery / non-lottery) varies depending on the setting is referred to as “there is a setting difference or a setting difference”. That is, although the re-play E may be won independently, it is a replay that is a duplicate win with the 1st type BB in some of the cases, and the winning probability of the double-winning that is the “replay E + 1 type BB” has a setting difference. Have.

  Re-game F (winning and re-game condition device number "13"), the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line regardless of which push order of the stop switch 35 is operated. That is, the replay E is a replay in which the result of the game obtained does not change regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. However, as described above, the re-game F is overlapped with the first type BB and wins (setting 1 to setting 6). Therefore, the "replay F" is also called "chance replay". Further, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, RT does not shift. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, the game medal is automatically bet.

  Here, the re-play F is always a duplicate win with the one-type BB when the win is made (re-play F + 1 type BB). That is, the re-play F is never won independently. Strictly speaking, in RT4 which is an internal medium game, the re-game F is individually won, but in this case, since the winning information of the bonus (1st class BB) has been carried over, it is included in the double winning in a broad sense.

  Further, the “replay F + 1 type BB” is different in that there is no setting difference in the winning probability when compared with the above-mentioned “replay E + 1 type BB”. Specifically, according to FIG. 26, which will be described later, in any of the combination lottery tables of the settings 1 to 6, the number of "29" is set in the "replay F + 1 type BB". To summarize the above, the re-play F is a replay that is a duplicate win with a special combination (1st class BB), and there is no setting difference in the win probability of the duplicate win.

  The winning and replay condition device numbers “16” to “39” (partly not shown) shown in FIG. 24 are small wins. In the present embodiment, there are 24 small wins (winnings A1 to A6, winnings B1 to B3, winnings C, winnings D, winnings E, winnings F, winnings G (not shown), winnings H, winnings I, as small winnings. (Not shown), winning J (not shown), winning K (not shown), winning L (not shown), winning M (not shown), winning N, winning O, winning P, winning Q). . The prizes A1 to A6 are also collectively referred to as “winning group A”, and the wins B1 to B3 are collectively referred to as “winning group B”.

  Winning A1 to winning A6 (winning and replaying condition device numbers “16” to “21”), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct push order, the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is displayed on the activated line. Then, nine game medals are paid out. Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong pressing order, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 02 to winning 09 (limited to those operating) is effective, depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. Displayed on the line, one game medal is paid out. When the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong pressing order, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the activated line depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switch 35, and the process proceeds to RT1. I have something to do. That is, the winning prizes A1 to A6 are the small winning combinations in which the obtained game result is different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 35. Further, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the ineffective line (the left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). To be done. Therefore, “winning prize A1 to winning prize A6” are also called “push order bell”.

  In addition, the correct answer pressing order in the prize A1 is "left first", the correct answer pressing order in the prize A2 is "left first", the correct answer pressing order in the prize A3 is "middle first", and the correct answer pressing order in the prize A4 is The correct answer order is "middle first", the correct answer order in winning A5 is "right first", the correct answer order in winning A6 is "right first", and a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 The probability that is displayed on the activated line is "1/3" for all of the winning prizes A1 to A6. That is, the winning prizes A1 to A6 are push-down bells of three choices.

  Winning B1 to winning B3 (winning and replaying condition device numbers “22” to “24”), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct push order, the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is displayed on the activated line. Then, 9 game medals are paid out. In addition, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong pressing order, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 02 to the winning 09 (limited to those which are operating) is displayed on the activated line, and one game medal is displayed. Be paid out. That is, the winning prizes B1 to B3 are the small winning combinations in which the obtained game result is different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 35. Further, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the ineffective line (the left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). To be done. Therefore, “winning prize B1 to winning prize B3” are also called “push order bell”.

  In addition, the correct answer pressing order in the prize B1 is "left first / middle first", the correct answer pressing order in the prize B2 is "middle first / right first", and the correct answer pressing order in the prize B3 is "right first". 1 / left first ”, and the probability that the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is displayed on the activated line is“ 2/3 ”for all winning B1 to winning B3.

  In the present embodiment, in the game state in which the instruction function does not operate (during non-AT), the stop switch 35 may be operated in the correct push order in the game in which the push order bell (winning group A, winning group B) is won. If so (the game medals may increase), the stop switch 35 may be operated in an incorrect pressing order (the game medals may decrease), thus suppressing the increase of the game medals. A game section can be formed. On the other hand, in the game state in which the instruction function operates (during AT), in the game in which the push order bell (winning group A, winning group B) is won, the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct pushing order according to the instruction function (game medal). Therefore, it is possible to form a game section in which game medals increase.

  Winning C (winning and re-playing condition device number "25"), no matter which press order of the stop switch 35 is operated, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, and 9 game medals are displayed. Will be paid out. That is, the prize C is a small winning combination in which the result of the game obtained does not differ regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35. In addition, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the invalid line (the left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). To be done. Therefore, "Winning C" is also called "bell (common bell)".

  Winning D (winning and re-playing condition device number “26”) is a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 10, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 35, no matter which push order the stop switch 35 is operated. It is displayed on the activated line and four game medals are paid out. That is, the winning prize D is a small winning combination in which the obtained game result varies depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, "Winning D" is also called "weak watermelon".

  Winning E (winning and re-playing condition device number “27”) is a symbol corresponding to winning 10 to winning 12 depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 35 no matter which push order the stop switch 35 is operated. Is displayed on the activated line and four game medals are paid out. That is, the winning prize E is a small winning combination in which the obtained game result varies depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the activated line. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 11 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the invalid line (upper left tier-middle upper tier-upper right tier display line). To be done. Then, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 12 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the invalid line (left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage display line). To be done. Therefore, "Prize E" is also called "strong watermelon".

  In the present embodiment, when a strong watermelon (winning prize E) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning prizes 11 and 12 is preferentially displayed on the activated line. When a strong watermelon (winning prize E) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 10 may be preferentially displayed on the activated line.

  Winning F (winning and re-playing condition device number "28"), even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order, the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, and two game medals are displayed. Will be paid out. That is, the winning prize F is a small winning combination in which the result of the game obtained does not differ regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Further, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 is displayed on the activated line, the "cherry / omission-cherry / red seven-omission" is an invalid line (lower left stage-middle middle stage-upper right stage). Display line). Therefore, the “winning prize F” is also called “weak cherry”.

  Winning H (winning and re-playing condition device number “30”), the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 13 or winning 14 is displayed on the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35, and two pieces are displayed. The game medal of is paid out. That is, the winning prize H is a small winning combination in which the result of the game obtained does not differ regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35. Further, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is displayed on the activated line, "cherry-cherry / red seven-cherry / omission" is an invalid line (left middle-middle middle-right middle). Display line). Further, as described above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 is displayed on the activated line, the "cherry / omission-cherry / red seven-omission" is an invalid line (lower left stage-middle middle stage-upper right stage). Display line). Therefore, "winning prize H" is also called "strong cherry".

  In the present embodiment, when a strong cherry (winning prize H) is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 13 is preferentially displayed on the activated line. When a strong cherry (winning prize H) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 14 may be preferentially displayed on the activated line.

  The prize N, the prize O, the prize P, and the prize Q (the prize and re-play condition device numbers “36” to “39”) are prizes 20 to 23 (actuation regardless of which press order of the stop switch 35 is operated. The combination of symbols corresponding to (the ones that have been played) is displayed on the activated line, and 10 game medals are paid out. That is, the winning N, the winning O, the winning P, and the winning Q are small wins in which the result of the game is the same no matter which pressing order of the stop switch 35 is operated. Further, any of the winning N, the winning O, the winning P, and the winning Q is a small winning combination that is a target of the lottery only when the type 1 BB is operated (when the RB is operated). Therefore, “winning N, winning O, winning P, winning Q” are also referred to as “JAC (JAC1 to JAC4)”.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a role lottery table used in the role lottery. In the present embodiment, different role lottery tables are used for each setting (setting 1 to setting 6) and RT (non-RT, RT1 to RT4, type 1 BB operation (RB operation)). In FIG. 26, the registered number for each RT in the setting 1 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 26, the re-game D, the re-game G, the re-game H, the prize G, and the prizes I to M are omitted. Further, in FIG. 26, some of the numbers are omitted. However, the omitted number has a value of at least 1.

  In the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 26, the total number of units (total number of units) is “65536”. Therefore, the winning probability of the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is calculated by dividing the entered number by “65536”. For example, the winning probability of the replay A1 at RT is “1437/65536”.

  As described above, the 1st type BB may be independently won, may be won by the re-game E in duplicate, and may be won by the re-game F in duplicate, and are shown separately in FIG. ing. Specifically, "1 type BB" means the case where 1 type BB wins alone, and "re-play E + 1 type BB" means the case where 1 type BB wins re-play E in duplicate. “Re-game F + 1 type BB” means a case where 1-type BB overlaps with the re-game F and wins. Further, "replay E" means a case where the replay E wins alone, and "replay F" means a case where the replay F wins alone.

  In the present embodiment, the re-game E may not win in duplicate with 1 type BB in the case of setting 1, and may win in duplicate with 1 type BB in the case of setting 2 or more. In FIG. 26, the number of "replay E" in RT1 is "327", and the number of "replay E + 1 type BB" is "0" in any RT, so the replay in setting 1 is performed. It can be seen that E may be elected independently, but may not be elected redundantly with the 1st type BB.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, in the setting 2 or more, since the number of "replay E + 1 type BB" is "1" or more, the replay E in the setting 2 or more overlaps with the type 1 BB. You can see that you may win. That is, it can be seen that there is a setting difference in the winning probability of “replay E + 1 type BB”.

  In the present embodiment, the re-game F may be won in duplicate with the first type BB. In FIG. 26, the number of "replay F" is "0" in any RT of the non-internal game, and the number of "replay F + 1 type BB" in RT1 is "29". It can be seen that the re-game F in the setting 1 may be won by itself, but may be won by overlapping with the first type BB. Although not shown, the number of "replay F + 1 type BB" is "29" even if the setting is 2 or more. That is, it can be seen that there is no difference in the winning probabilities in the “replay F + 1 type BB”.

  In this embodiment, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations other than “replay D (not shown)”, “winning C”, “first type BB”, and “replay E + 1 type BB” have no difference in winning probability.

[3-3. Reel control means]
The reel control means 70 will be described. The reel control means 70 drives the motor 40 to rotate the reel 39. Further, the reel control means 70 stops the rotation of the reel 39 by driving the motor 40.

  When the start switch 34 is operated, the reel control means 70 drives the motor 40 to rotate the reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c). Then, after the rotation speed of the reel 39 reaches a constant speed (a speed of about 80 rotations per minute), one of the stop switches 35 (left stop switch 35a, middle stop switch 35b, right stop switch 35c) is operated. Then, the stop position of the reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c) corresponding to the stop switch 35 is determined based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means 69, and the motor 40 is set. The reel 39 is driven to stop the rotation of the reel 39 at the determined stop position.

  Although the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped within 190 ms after the stop switch 35 is operated, the reel control means 70 uses the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination as much as possible in the effective line. The rotation of the reel 39 is stopped as shown in (display control), and the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the activated line. Control kicking).

  Specifically, the symbols from the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated to the symbols four points ahead are the symbols that can be displayed (pulled in). For example, referring to FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" on the left reel 39a is located on the activated line (upper left row), four points ahead of the position. Up to the bell symbol with the symbol number “5” can be displayed on the activated line (upper left).

  Instead of the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated, the symbols from one symbol to four symbols may be displayed (retracted). In this case, for example, referring to FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" on the left reel 39a is located on the activated line (upper left row), one From the watermelon symbol of the previous symbol number "2" to the replay symbol of the symbol number "6" four points ahead, the symbols that can be displayed on the activated line (upper left row) are displayed.

  That is, when there is a symbol forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination among the symbols that can be displayed (pulled in), the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the symbol is displayed. (Control pull-in). However, if there is no symbol that constitutes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination among the symbols that can be displayed (pulled in), the symbol will be dropped.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of symbols forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination among the symbols which can be displayed (retracted) by the control of the reel control means 70, which stop switch 35 is pressed The symbols to be preferentially displayed are determined in advance depending on whether they are operated in order or the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated, and the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the symbols are displayed (pull-in control). .

[3-4. Display determination means, payout means]
The display determination means 71 will be described. The display determination means 71 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination when the rotation of all reels 39 is stopped.

  Next, the payout means 72 will be described. When the display determination means 71 determines that the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the small winning combinations, the payout means 72 determines the number of sheets corresponding to the combination of the symbols. Pay out game medals. The payout means 72 automatically bets a game medal when the display determination means 71 determines that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to any replay. May be.

[3-5. RT control means]
The RT control means 75 will be described. The RT control unit 75 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery unit 69 and the result of the determination by the display determination unit 71, and determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied. When it is done, the RT is transferred.

  Although all the detailed explanations are omitted, some of the RT transition conditions in the present embodiment are as described in the remarks column of FIG. 24. Specifically, for example, in the game won in the replay A group in RT1, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 04 is displayed on the activated line. , RT control means 75 shifts the RT state to RT2. On the other hand, in the game won in the replay A group at RT1, when the stop switch 35 is not operated in the correct push order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 01 is displayed on the activated line, and at this time, the RT control The means 75 shifts the RT state to non-RT.

[3-6. External signal transmission means]
The external signal transmitting means 77 will be described. The external signal transmitting means 77 transmits an external signal to the external terminal board 100. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, for example, information regarding AT (ART), error information, information regarding payout or betting of game medals, and the like are output signals as output signals from the output port 62 (output port 6). ) Sent from.

  When the main control board 60 executes the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S48 in FIG. 34) for confirming the end of each game, the external signal is transmitted when the game end check process is executed. The external signal data generation process is performed. Then, in the interrupt process (I_INTR), the output data of the external signal output from the output port 6 is set (stored in the B register), and the external signal is transmitted to the external terminal board 100 (steps S73 and S74 in FIG. 55). .

  When the external signal transmitted from the output port 6 is input to the external terminal board 100, it is transmitted to an external device (for example, the hall computer 200) connected to the external terminal board 100. As a result, the hall computer 200 can obtain game information of the slot machine 10 (for example, activation and continuation of ART, payout of game medals, etc.) from the received external signal, which is useful for management of the slot machine 10. it can. Further, the hall computer 200 can cause the data counter or the like to output the game information of the slot machine 10 based on the received external signal. In the case of a data counter or the like arranged near the slot machine 10, it may be connected to the external terminal board 100 to directly receive an external signal from the external terminal board 100.

[3-7. Control command transmission means]
The control command transmitting means 78 will be described. The control command transmitting unit 78 transmits various kinds of information (control command) required when the sub control board 80 controls effects and the like to the sub control board 80.

  As the information transmitted by the control command transmission means 78, information indicating that a game medal has been inserted, information based on a lottery result (winning combination) of a winning combination, information indicating that the reel 39 has started rotating, and a stop switch 35. Information on the operation of the reels, information that the reel 39 has stopped, information on the stop position of each reel 39 (symbols stopped on the activated line), winning combination information, gaming state (for example, presence / absence of AT / ART) and internal state Information and the like.

[4. Control processing by main control board]
Information processing by the main control board 60 (mainly by the main CPU 65, but may be omitted hereinafter) in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described based on a flowchart. In the following description, various processes performed by the main control board 60 for information processing will be outlined in a flowchart, but these figures do not show all information processing by the main control board 60. Rather, it is merely an example of an overview or part. Further, in each drawing, the English notation shown along with the process name (for example, “program start (M_PRG_START)” shown in FIG. 27) is an example of the program module name.

[4-1. Program start]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_START). The “program start (M_PRG_START)” process is a process performed when information processing is started by the main control board 60, and the main CPU 65 reads and executes a predetermined program stored in the ROM 64. The process may be regarded as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 27, when the "program start" process is started, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) initializes the register in step S11.

  The initialization of the registers in step S11 means setting the initial values necessary for the normal operation of the slot machine 10 in various registers. Specific processing is, for example, serial processing provided in the main CPU 65. The communication speed setting of the communication circuit, the interrupt type setting (for example, maskable interrupt, etc.), the parity bit setting for the control command to be transmitted (for example, even parity, etc.) can be mentioned. .

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of registers that can be used by the main control board 60 are provided. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 65 has a plurality of registers such as A register to L register and transmission register. are doing. Each register is a 1-byte register that can store 1-byte (8-bit) information. However, by using two registers together such as "HL register", 2-byte (16-bit) information can be stored. It can be a memorable 2-byte register.

  Next, in step S12, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. The power-off processing completed flag is a flag (not shown) for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power of the slot machine 10 was turned on. Processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) ”is stored in the RWM 63. Details of the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) are shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S12 that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value (that is, an abnormal value) (NO in step S12), the checksum calculation (steps S13 to S14) of the RWM 63 is not executed. It proceeds to step S15.

  In step S13, the main control board 60 executes the calculation of the checksum of the RWM 63. Specifically, the check is performed in the same range (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, the stack area) as the checksum calculation (step S624 in FIG. 58) of the RWM 63 executed in the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) described later. Calculate Sam. In step S13, the 1-byte data stored in the RWM 63 is added.

  Next, in step S14, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation in step S13 has been completed in the entire scheduled range of the RWM 63. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 63 for which the checksum is calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is calculated. When it is determined that the checksum calculation is not completed (NO in step S14), the process returns to step S13 to continue the checksum calculation. When it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed (YES in step S14), the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, also in the process described below, when the data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 63 is initialized, the same process as the above is executed in the specified range of the RWM 63. I shall.

  In step S15, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation of the RWM 63 has been normally completed in all the ranges, that is, from step S12 YES to step S14 YES When S15 is reached, the normal value is stored as the power interruption recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag has an abnormal value, or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation of the RWM 63, that is, when the process goes to NO through step S12 and reaches step S15, If any abnormality (for example, the checksum value is an abnormal value) is detected in S13 to S14, the abnormal value is stored as the power failure recovery data.

  In the next step S16, the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD” (see FIG. 11) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register).

  Then, in step S17, it is determined whether or not the "designated switch" is turned on based on the input port 0 level data. Here, the "designated switch" is a signal of the door switch 15 (D2 bit door switch signal) and a signal of the setting key switch 12 (D1 bit setting key switch signal) of the input port 0. Only when all such designated switches are on, that is, the door switch signal is on (the front door 2 is open), and the setting key switch signal is on (the setting key is inserted) (step S17). YES), the setting change is permitted. Therefore, when all the designated switches are turned on in step S17, it is possible to shift to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), and the process first proceeds to step S18. On the other hand, if any one of the designated switches is not turned on (NO in step S17), the shift to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is not permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. In this way, by assigning a designated switch composed of a plurality of switch signals to the same input port (input port 0 in this example), it becomes easy to uniformly determine whether or not the designated switch is on.

  In step S18, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. If it is determined to be abnormal (YES in step S18), the process proceeds to step S21. (NO in step S18), the process proceeds to step S19. Whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality can be determined by the value of the power failure recovery data stored in the register in step S15. If it is an abnormal value, it is determined to be a power failure recovery abnormality, and if it is a normal value. For example, it is judged that the power failure recovery error is not normal (power failure recovery normal).

  In step S19, it is determined whether or not the setting cannot be changed. When it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (YES in step S19), the process proceeds to step S20 because the transition to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is not permitted, and it is determined that the setting is possible. If so (NO in step S19), the process proceeds to step S21, and the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is executed. Whether or not the setting cannot be changed can be determined by the value of the setting change flag. If the value indicates that the setting cannot be changed, it is determined that the setting cannot be changed. to decide.

  The setting unchangeable flag is one (D6 bit) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored in the address “F01E” of the RWM 63, and in the main process (M_MAIN) described later with reference to FIG. 34. During the part lottery process (step S41) to the game end check process (step S49), a value indicating impossibility is set. Details of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) are shown in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the setting change impossible flag is provided has been described, but when the setting change is possible at all times, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S19 is unnecessary.

  In step S20, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off recovery is normal. Whether or not the power failure recovery is normal can be determined by the value of the power failure recovery data stored in the register in step S15, as in step S18. If it is a normal value, it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. If the value is abnormal, it is judged that the power recovery is not normal (power recovery error).

  When the main control board 60 determines in step S20 that the power failure recovery is normal (YES in step S20), the process proceeds to step S22, and power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) is executed. Details of the power restoration process are shown in FIG.

  When the main control board 60 determines in step S20 that there is a power failure recovery abnormality (NO in step S20), it proceeds to step S23 and executes non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP). Details of the non-recoverable error processing are shown in FIG. The non-recoverable error means an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process is executed, and includes a plurality of patterns of errors. For example, when it is determined in step S20 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, it is determined that the error is an unrecoverable error of the "E1" error, and information indicating the "E1" error is displayed at a predetermined digit.

[4-1-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET). The process may be regarded as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 28, first, in step S101, the main control board 60 stores the “predetermined range” in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 63. The process of step S101 is a set for preparing when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and specifically, the setting value data, the gaming state (for example, RT state), the winning flag, etc. are not initialized. The initialization range thus excluded is referred to as a “predetermined range”.

  Next, in step S102, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off recovery data stored in step S15 of FIG. 27 is a normal value. When it is determined that the data is a normal value (YES in step S102), the process proceeds to step S104. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not the normal value (NO in step S102), the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the main control board 60 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 63. Here, the "specific range" is a target range different from the "predetermined range" of step S101. Specifically, when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, the initialization range in which the setting value data, the game state, the winning flag, and the like are included in the initialization target is set as the “specific range”.

  Next, proceeding to step S104, the main control board 60 starts initialization of the RWM 63 for the “predetermined range” set in step S101 or the “specific range” set in step S103. In the next step S105, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S104 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is not completed (NO in step S105), the process returns to step S104, and when it is determined that the initialization is completed (YES in step S105), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing are set as the start processing of the interrupt processing. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the process of setting the cycle (2.235 ms) of this timer interrupt. Then, after the processing of step S106, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed before the "interrupt activation" process of step S106 is performed.

  Next, in step S107, an output request set at the start of setting change is set. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change processing will be started.

  The "output request setting" is often executed in the process described below, but means the process of setting the control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80, like the process in step S107. Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also includes a command which is a basis of the command to be actually transmitted.

  Next, in step S108, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). The control command set 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29, but is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM63). The “control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET)” is often executed in the process described below, but means a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80, as in step S108. To do. In the present embodiment, the control command data consists of the first control command data and the second control command data, and different first control command data and second control command data are transmitted according to the output request.

  Next, in step S109, the main control board 60 sets a wait time (wait time), and in the next step S110, executes a wait process of waiting for the wait time set in step S109 to elapse.

  In the present embodiment, in step S109, the number of interruptions “224” is set as the waiting time, and in step S110, until the number of interruptions counts “224” (1 is subtracted for each number of interruptions, the set number of interruptions is Wait processing is executed (until it becomes “0”). Since the time of one interrupt is 2.235 ms as described above, by waiting for 224 interrupts, a wait process of about 500 ms (2.235 ms × 224 times = 500.64 ms) is performed. This wait time is a time that is secured for the completion of the initialization of the RWM 83 by the sub control board 80. Further, in the following description, the “waiting process” refers to a process of waiting so as not to execute the next process (step) until a predetermined time elapses. However, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed even during wait processing.

  As described above, the reason why the wait process is executed in step S110 is that the initialization process of the RWM 63 on the main control board 60 side (step S114) is completed in a relatively short time, while the sub-control board 80 side is the same. This is because the initialization process (details omitted) of the RWM 83 performed in step 1) takes a relatively long time, and thus the time is adjusted on the main control board 60 side. In the slot machine 10, since data input from the sub control board 80 to the main control board 60 is not permitted, the main control board 60 side cannot know whether or not the initialization processing is completed on the sub control board 80 side. Therefore, on the main control board 60 side, wait processing is executed for sufficient time adjustment.

  As a specific example, the clear range of the RWM 63 of the main control board 60 (the range cleared when the setting is changed) is, for example, 512 bytes of the addresses “F000 (H) to F1FF (H)”. On the other hand, the clear range of the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 is, for example, about 12 to 13 gigabytes of the address “000000 (H) to 800000 (H)”. From this, the main control board 60 side and the sub control board 80 side may greatly differ in the time required for the initialization processing, and the progress of the control processing in the main control board 60 and the progress of the control processing by the sub control board 80. It is effective to perform the above-mentioned wait processing in order to prevent the and from becoming out of synchronization.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S107 and S108 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the wait process of step S110. However, while the wait process is being executed in step S110, the processes after step S111 are not started (in other words, the main process does not proceed). With this configuration, the sub control board 80 can control and output the effect based on various commands at a timing synchronized with the processing of the main control board 60.

  After the wait process in step S110, the main control board 60 determines in step S111 whether or not the set value is within the normal range. In the present embodiment, the set value is any integer of “1” to “6”, and the set value data “_NB_BANK” corresponding to the set value is stored in the RWM 63. As described above with reference to FIG. 11, the normal range of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is a value corresponding to “0” to “5”. In step S111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is in the normal range, and when it is determined that the value is not in the normal range (for example, a value indicating “6” or more is stored) ( After NO in step S111), the process proceeds to step S113 via step S112. In step S112, "1" is stored as the set value (that is, "0" is stored in the set value data "_NB_BANK"). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S111 that the set value is within the normal range (a value indicating “0” to “5” is stored) (YES in step S111), the process of step S112 is not performed, and step S112 is performed. Proceed to S113.

  In step S113, the main control board 60 performs display control (lighting) of the LED whose setting is being changed. By performing the process of step S113, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, the LEDs (the set value display LED 66 and the acquired number display LED 47) displayed during the setting change can be turned on. In the present embodiment, in step S113, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 66 and the value of the display data is updated in order to display "---" on the acquired number display LED 47. Since each of the above values has been initialized in step S104, it is "0" before being updated.

  Next, in step S114, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has been detected. Specifically, the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is determined, and it is determined whether the D0 bit to which the setting change / reset switch signal is assigned is “1 (ON)”. If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has been detected (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and the process proceeds to step S116. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is not "1", it is determined that the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has not been detected (NO in step S114), and the process proceeds to step S116 without performing the process of step S115.

  In step S115, the set value is updated. Specifically, the data value corresponding to the set value is stored (updated) in a predetermined area (address “F0000” in which “_NB_BANK” is stored) of the RWM 63. By executing the interrupt process after the process of step S115, the updated set value is displayed on the set value display LED 66.

  In step S116, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the operation of the start switch 34 is detected. Specifically, the determination is made from the D6 bit (start switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1. In this embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is fixed. Therefore, when it is determined in step S116 that the start switch 34 is not operated (NO in step S116), the process returns to step S114, and when it is determined that the start switch 34 is operated (YES in step S116), step S117. Proceed to.

  Note that if YES is determined in step S114 and the setting value is updated in step S115, and if NO is determined in step S116, the process returns to step S114 again. At this time, since the D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is generated by the interrupt processing as described above, it is not updated until the next interrupt processing is executed. In other words, since the D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is maintained at “1”, YES is determined again in step S114, and an unintended setting value There is a risk of updating (when the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once, the setting value is updated multiple times).

  Therefore, at least when it is determined to be YES in step S114, a wait process for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, a process of waiting until one interrupt process is executed) is executed, so that the rising edge data of the input port 0 is obtained. If the D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of “_PT_IN0_UP” is set to “0” and the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once, it is determined that YES is determined again in step S114. To prevent. At this time, a 1-byte timer storage area in FIGS. 15 and 59, which will be described later, may have a storage area for storing the number of interrupts (“1” in the present embodiment) for executing wait processing.

  It should be noted that the method of preventing the setting value from being updated a plurality of times when the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, but may be, for example, once, step S114. If YES is determined, it is also possible to adopt a method of forcibly setting the D0 bit of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 to “0”.

  In step S117, the main control board 60 determines whether the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. Specifically, the determination is made from the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0. When it is determined in step S117 that the setting key switch 12 is not turned off (NO in step S117), the process of step S117 is repeated until it is determined that it is turned off, and it is determined that the setting key switch 12 is turned off. If (YES in step S117), the process proceeds to step S118.

  In step S118, the main control board 60 performs LED display control (turning off) after the setting change is completed. Specifically, first, data for turning off the set value display LED 66 is set. Secondly, data for enabling the stored number display LED 45 and the acquired number display LED 47 to be turned on is set. Thirdly, a process of changing the value of the acquired number display data is executed in order to display "00" on the acquired number display LED 47. By performing the process of step S118, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, the set value display LED 66 is turned off, and the stored number display LED 45 and the acquired number display LED 47 can be turned on.

  Next, in step S119, the main control board 60 sets the output request at the end of the setting change, as in step S107. In the output request set of step S119, the setting change process is terminated, and a control command for notifying the sub control board 80 of the determined set value is set. Next, in step S120, the control command set 1 is executed as in step S108.

  Then, after the process of step S120 is completed, the process moves to the execution of the main process (M_MAIN). Details of the main processing are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).

  According to FIG. 29, first, in step S121, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. Then, in step S122, the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) is executed. A control command is written in the control command set 2, the details of which are shown in FIG.

  A storage area (not shown) of a control command buffer in which control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 is stored is set in the RWM 63. In this embodiment, the control command data can store up to 32 commands (64 bytes).

  Next, in step S123, the interrupt process prohibited in step S121 is released to permit execution of the interrupt process. That is, in the control command set 1, since interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2 in which control commands are written, malfunction due to execution of interrupt processing during control command writing processing (normal It is possible to prevent writing to an address different from the write address of the above).

  In the present embodiment, an interrupt flag (not shown) for storing prohibition / permission (cancellation) of interrupt processing is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on by the main CPU 65 when the timing of executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms after the interrupt process is prohibited) comes after the interrupt is prohibited in step S121. After that, the main CPU 65 clears (turns off) the interrupt flag when releasing the inhibition of the interrupt processing. In this way, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt processing is prohibited / permitted (released) by determining whether the interrupt flag is turned on or off when the timing for executing the interrupt processing comes.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET).

  According to FIG. 30, first, in step S131, the main control board 60 sets the address of the control command buffer by setting the start address of the control command buffer.

  In step S132, the write pointer is acquired. The write pointer is for designating to which address of the RWM 63 the data of the control command is written. In step S132, since the write pointer at the present time is stored, the process of reading the write pointer I do.

  Next, in step S133, the designated address is acquired. Specifically, it is a process of obtaining the write destination address (designated address) of the RWM 63 from the start address of the control command buffer and the data indicating the current position of the write pointer.

  Next, in step S134, the data of the designated address is acquired. Specifically, it is a process of reading the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 63 indicated by the designated address based on the designated address obtained in step S133.

  Then, in step S135, it is determined whether or not the data of the designated address is "0" (control command <32?). When the data at the designated address is not “0”, it means that the data already exists at the designated address, in other words, the state where 32 commands before transmission are set. In this case (NO in step S135), the process of the control command set 2 ends. As a result, the data writing process is not executed, and the data of the designated address is prevented from being overwritten. On the other hand, when the data of the designated address is “0”, that is, when the data of the designated address does not exist (YES in step S135), the process proceeds to step S136.

  In step S136, it is determined whether or not the data to be written in the control command buffer is data that needs to refer to the data stored in RWM 63 (RWM designation?). For example, the number of game medals inserted at the time of automatic betting at the time of replay winning corresponds to “RWM designation” because it depends on the number of bets in the previous game and the game state in the current game. Although detailed description of determining whether or not the RWM designation is satisfied is omitted, specifically, for example, the determination may be made based on whether or not the D7 bit of the value stored in the D register is “0”. it can. If it is determined in step S136 that the RWM is designated (YES in step S136), the process proceeds to step S138 through the process in step S137. If it is determined that the RWM is not designated (NO in step S136), step S137. The process proceeds to step S138 without performing the process.

  In step S137, the data indicating the second control command is stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register). Specifically, the data to be written as the second control command is read from the RWM 63 and stored in a predetermined register (E register).

  Then, in step S138, the data indicating the first control command is stored in the RWM 63. This is a process of storing the first control command in the “specified address” obtained in step S133, and specifically, a process of storing the value of the D register stored before the execution of the control command set 2. Yes (in the case of RWM designation, a value obtained by adding “80 (H)” to the value of the D register is stored).

  Next, in step S139, the data indicating the second control command is stored in the RWM 63. More specifically, in step S139, the second control command is stored at the address next to the storage destination of the first control command stored in step S138.

  After that, in step S140, the value of the write pointer is updated by "+1". As described above, in the control command set 2, the data indicating the first control command and the data indicating the second control command are written in the two storage areas of the RWM 63, but when the designated address is acquired in step S133, the data is written. By doubling the pointer data and computing it, the write pointer value need only be incremented by "1".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the output request set (step S107 in FIG. 28) and the control command set 1 (step S108 in FIG. 28) at the start of setting change, The control command data is written in the control command buffer at a predetermined address. Then, these control command data are transmitted to the sub control board 80 by an interrupt process described later. Note that, in the other “output request set” and “control command set 1” mentioned in the following description, similarly, the control command data written in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt processing. It

[4-1-2. Power shutdown recovery processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON). The process may be regarded as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 31, in step S141, the main control board 60 returns the stack pointer. Here, to restore the stack pointer means to store the data (address) of the stack pointer saved in the RWM 63 by the power-off processing executed when the power is cut, in the stack pointer (SP register). Refers to. An area of the RWM 63 that saves data (for example, register value and instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing) at the time of power failure is called a stack area, and a stack pointer is used to save data to the stack area. It may refer to a storage area (SP register) that stores data for specifying an address or the data itself.

  Next, in step S142, the set value is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the set value is within the normal range (whether or not the value of the set value data "_NB_BANK" is within the normal range). When it is determined in step S142 that the set value is within the normal range (YES in step S142), the process proceeds to step S143. When it is determined in step S142 that the set value is not within the normal range (NO in step S142), the process proceeds to step S152, and non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to the "E6" error is executed. The details of the non-recoverable error processing are shown in FIG. 33. At this time, the acquired number display LED 47 displays that the error is “E6”.

  In step S143, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 63 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S144, initialization is executed for the initialization range of the RWM 63 set in step S143. Here, it is conceivable that a value will be stored in the RWM 63 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraud, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (normally once a day). There is.

  Next, in step S145, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 63 in step S144 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization of the RWM 63 is not completed (NO in step S144), the process returns to step S144. When it is determined that the initialization of the RWM 63 is completed (YES in step S144), the process proceeds to step S146.

  In step S146, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is set, and in the next step S147, the input port 0 to 2 read (SS_IN_READ) is executed to read the input port 0 to 2. Details of reading the input ports 0 to 2 are shown in FIG. By performing the processing of steps S146 to S147, each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 61 (input ports 0 to 2) before power-off is updated to the latest data.

  Next, in step S148, the specific information data at power-on is set. Specifically, this corresponds to the process of setting the power-off recovery transmission bit of the specific information flag (not shown) stored in the RWM 63 to "1". Then, in step S149, the output time of the external signal 4 at power recovery is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is a timer stored in the RWM 63, and a predetermined value (for example, “136”) is set in step S149, and thereafter, for each interrupt. The timer value is decremented.

  Next, in step S150, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to the interrupt activation (step S106 of FIG. 28) in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET).

  After that, in step S151, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (that is, the value is set to "0"), the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) is terminated, and the processing returns to the processing in which the power interruption occurred and restarts the processing. .

  In the above power restoration process, after the input ports 0 to 2 are read in step S147, the interrupt process is activated in step S150. This is because it is possible to avoid a different state due to the above. By performing such processing, it is possible to update the values of the RWM 63 of the input ports 0 to 2 to the latest state when the power is restored.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing reading of input ports 0 to 2 (SS_IN_READ).

  According to FIG. 32, first, in step S161, the main control board 60 sets the previous level data of the input port 0. Specifically, the address “F008” of the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD” stored in the RWM 63 is stored in the HL register (HL = F008). Then, the data of the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register.

  In step S162, the level data of the input port 0 this time is input. Specifically, the data input to the input port 0 is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S163, the current input data is changed to positive logic. More specifically, the data stored in the A register and the negative logic bit (11000011) of the input port 0 are XORed to change the data to positive logic, and the converted value is stored in the A register. .

  In the next step S164, input port 0 level data is set. More specifically, the AND operation of the A register value that is the operation result in step S163 and "1110011" is performed, the operation result is stored in the A register, and this A register value is input port 0 level data " _PT_IN0_OLD ”. That is, the value of the input port 0 level data is updated by the process of step S164. Further, the reason why the AND operation with "1110011" is executed is to ensure that the unused bits D4 to D6 are "0".

  Next, in step S165, the door switch signal (D2 bit) is read based on the input port 0 level data set in step S164. Then, in step S166, it is determined whether or not the door switch signal is on ("1"). When the door switch signal is ON (YES in step S166), the process proceeds to step S168, and when the door switch signal is OFF (NO in step S166), the process proceeds to step S168 via step S167.

  In step S167, the setting key switch signal (D1 bit) and the setting change / reset switch signal (D0 bit) are cleared (set to “0”).

  Then, in step S168, the changed bit data of this time and the previous time is generated. Specifically, the current input port 0 level data (A register value) and the previous input port 0 level data (B register value) are XORed and the operation result is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S169, the main control board 60 generates rising data of the input port 0. Specifically, in step S169, the following two processes are sequentially performed.

  First, the change bit data (A register value) generated in step S168 and the value stored in the input port 0 level data "_PT_IN0_OLD" set in step S164 are AND-operated, and the operation result is A register Remember. Secondly, the value of the L register is incremented by "1". As a result, "HL = F009" is obtained.

  Then, in step S170, the rising data of the input port 0 generated in step S169 is set. More specifically, the value stored in the A register in the first process of step S169 is stored in the address indicated by the HL register (that is, “F009”). Here, as shown in FIG. 11, since the address “F009” is the storage address of the input port 0 rising data “_PT_IN0_UP”, the rising data of the input port 0 is converted to the input port 0 by the processing of steps S169 to S170. 0 Rising data is stored in “_PT_IN0_UP”.

  In this way, by performing the processing up to step S170, the level data and the rising data are read for the input port 0.

  Next, in step S171, the address of the RWM 63 in which the level data of the next input port is stored is set. Specifically, the value of the L register is incremented by "1". As a result, "HL = F00A" is obtained. This address "F00A" is a storage address of the input port 1 level data "_PT_IN1_OLD" as shown in FIG.

  Then, in steps S172 to S175, the input port 1 level data "_PT_IN1_OLD" is set by performing the same processing as that performed in steps S161 to S164 for the input port 0 on the input port 1. Since it is repeated, the description of each process is omitted.

  Then, in steps S176 to S178, the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is set by performing the same processing as that performed in steps S168 to S170 for the input port 0 for the input port 1. Since it is repeated, the description of each process is omitted.

  In this way, by performing the processes of steps S172 to S178, the level data and the rising data of the input port 1 are read.

  Further, in step S179, as in step S171, the address of the RWM 63 in which the level data of the next input port is stored is set. Specifically, the value of the L register is incremented by "1". As a result, "HL = F00C" is obtained. This address "F00C" is a storage address of the input port 2 level data "_PT_IN2_OLD" as shown in FIG.

  Since the storage address of the input port 2 level data is set in the HL register in step S179, the same processing as steps S172 to S178 performed for input port 1 is performed for input port 2 in subsequent steps S180 to S185. Be seen. As a result, the level data and the rising data of the input port 2 are read.

  Then, when the process of step S185 is performed, the process of reading the input ports 0 to 2 (SS_IN_READ) ends.

[4-1-3. Unrecoverable error handling]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP).

First, in the present embodiment, as an example, a non-recoverable error is determined in the following cases. However, the non-recoverable error is not limited to these.
E1 error: When it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is not normal at the program start (M_PRG_START) (step S23 in FIG. 27).
E5 error: When it is determined that a display error has occurred in the main process (M_MAIN) (step S52 in FIG. 34).
E6 error: When it is determined in the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) that the set value is not within the normal range (step S152 in FIG. 31).
E7 error: When it is determined that a random number error has occurred in the interrupt process (I_INTR) (step S79 in FIG. 55).

  When the above-described unrecoverable error occurs, the setting is changed (the power is turned off, the setting key switch 12 is turned on under the condition where the power is turned off, and the power is turned on under the condition, By turning on the start switch 34 and then turning off the setting key switch 12), the main process (M_MAIN) can be executed, and the unrecoverable error can be canceled by such an operation.

  According to FIG. 33, in step S191, the main control board 60 prohibits interrupt processing. This process is similar to step S121 in FIG. 29, and control is performed so that an interrupt does not occur even when an interrupt request signal (INT signal) is input. By prohibiting the interrupt processing, updating of various data stored in the RWM 63, input / output, etc. are prevented from being executed by the interrupt processing, and erroneous information is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 or the external terminal board 100. It is prevented from being transmitted to the hall computer 200 via the.

  In step S192, all output ports 62 (for example, output ports 0 to 6) are turned off sequentially. Specifically, all “0” s (“00000000B”) are output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6, one output port at a time. In step S193, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "+1".

  Next, in step S194, it is determined whether or not all the output ports have been completed, that is, whether or not all the output ports have been completed, and when it is determined that all output ports have not been completed (NO in step S194), step S192. If it is determined that the process is completed (YES in step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

  As described above, by turning off all the output ports 62 (output ports 0 to 6) by the processing up to step S194, the active signal output before the execution of the processing is turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the seizure of the LED, the seizure of the motor 40, and the swallowing of the game medal.

  For example, when the power is cut off while the blocker signal is being output (the blocker signal is ON), the blocker 29 remains in the ON state (permission position) unless the process is executed, thereby detecting the game medal. Although the processing does not occur, the state in which the gaming medal passage in the permitted state is formed continues, so that the game medal is swallowed.

  Further, for example, when the power is cut off in the situation where the motor 40 outputs φ1 (the φ1 signal of the reel motor is ON), if the process is not executed, φ1 is continuously output until the reset signal is input. Become. Normally, the time until the reset signal is input is short, but if the power supply voltage drops momentarily, power-off processing is executed, and then the normal power supply voltage is supplied, the reset signal will be input. Without waiting, the reset wait will be repeated. Therefore, a situation may occur in which φ1 is continuously output.

  In step S195, the lower digit is set as the error display data. Next, in step S196, the upper digit is set as error display data.

  Then, in step S197, the LED is turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000B" to the address indicating the output port 0. Therefore, at the time of step S197, the outputs of all the LEDs are "0" (extinguished). This can prevent the flickering of the LED.

  Next, in step S198, a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 1 is performed (error display output). This is a process for displaying "E1", "E5", "E6", "E7", etc. as the error display content.

  Next, in step S199, the LED is turned on. This process is a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 0. Then, in step S200, it is determined whether or not the display wait has ended. Specifically, the display weight is a process of subtracting "-1" from the value of the B register and determining whether the value of the B register becomes "0".

  Here, in the present embodiment, “255” is set as the B register value at the start of the process of step S198. Then, the subtraction process is performed until the B register value becomes “0”. In this embodiment, the internal system clock is 16 MHz, which is approximately 0.128 ms (“1 / internal system clock (16 MHz)” × 256 × 8 (instruction) + α (other instruction) ≈0.128 ms), and The register value is set to change from "255" to "0".

  When it is determined in step S200 that the display weight has not ended (NO in step S200), the process of step S200 is repeated until it is determined that the display weight has ended (until the B register value becomes “0”). When it is determined in step S200 that the display wait has ended (YES in step S200), the process proceeds to step S201, and switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is executed. Then, it returns to step S197.

  By switching the upper digit and the lower digit in step S201 and then returning to step S197, the lower digit display can be switched to the upper digit display by the same program processing. Further, the switching period of the upper digit / lower digit is about 0.128 ms. Therefore, after the upper digit is turned on for 0.128 ms, the process of turning on the lower digit for 0.128 ms is repeated.

  In the case where the "E1" error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the processing of steps S197 to S201, after "E" is displayed for about 0.128 ms on the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 47 (during this period, The lower digit of the acquired number display LED 47 is turned off, and then "1" is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 47 for about 0.128 ms (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 47 is turned off during this time).

  Also, the switching period of the upper digit / lower digit is faster than the timer interrupt period (2.235 ms), and the brightness at the time of error display is high. In other words, when the error display is performed using the LED, the non-recoverable error has higher brightness than the normal error, so that the device on the side of the sub-control board 80 (effect lamp 19, speaker 20, image display device 21). Even if the error notification using () is not performed (not performed), it becomes easy for the hall clerk to notice.

  By performing the non-recoverable error processing as described above, even if an error occurs in the period in which the timer interrupt processing is not executed (does not want to execute), the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration An appropriate LED can be used to perform an error indication.

  Although the display weight process (step S200) is provided as described above in the present embodiment, the non-recoverable error process can be performed without the display weight process. In this case, since the upper digit and the lower digit are switched at high speed on the software, the processing time of steps S197 to S201 is substantially "0", and the display of the upper digit and the display of the lower digit are switched by the program. Processing speed and the response speed of the LED. Then, as described above, if a wait time of about 0.1 ms is provided, one of the LEDs continues to light up during the wait time, so that a constant brightness (light flux) of the LED can be secured. On the other hand, if a high-performance LED of recent years is adopted, it is possible to secure sufficient brightness for visual observation even if the lighting time is a moment (only in step S199).

[4-2. Main processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN). Further, FIGS. 35 to 54 are processes showing a subroutine during the main process. Furthermore, as described above, during the main process, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed at predetermined intervals (2.235 ms).

  According to FIG. 34, first, in step S31, the main control board 60 sets the stack pointer. Here, the process is to store F200 (H) in the stack pointer (SP register).

  Next, in a step S32, a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) is executed. The details of the game start set are shown in FIG. 35, and after execution of the game start set, after executing medal acceptance (MS_MEDAL_START), the process proceeds to step S33. The details of the start of medal acceptance are shown in FIG.

  In step S33, a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) is executed. This process is a process of reading how many game medals are currently bet (the number of bets), and is different from reading the stored number. Details of reading the game medals are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S34, it is determined whether or not there is a bet medal based on the bet number read in step S33. The presence / absence of a bet medal can be determined by the value of the "zero flag" set in the process of reading a game medal.

  Here, the "zero flag" is a flag for determining whether or not the result of the operation is "0", and indicates a specific bit of a flag register (for example, F register) provided in the MPU. When the specific bit is “0” (that is, the zero flag is “0”), it indicates that the operation result is not “0”, and when the specific bit is “1” (that is, the zero flag is “1”), , Indicates that the calculation result is “0”.

  Here, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, in the game medal reading, the value (bet number) read from the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register), and the A register If the register value of “0” indicates “0” (that is, if there is no bet medal), the zero flag is set to “1”. On the other hand, if the register value of the A register is a value other than “0” (that is, if a bet medal exists), the zero flag is set to “0”. Therefore, in step S34, the presence or absence of a bet medal can be determined depending on whether the zero flag is "0" or "1".

  When it is determined in step S34 that there is a bet medal (zero flag = “0”) (YES in step S34), the process proceeds to step S36. When it is determined in step S34 that there is no bet medal (zero flag = "1") (NO in step S34), the process proceeds to step S35 to execute a medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP), and then the process proceeds to step S36. The details of the medal insertion wait state are shown in FIG.

  In step S36, the main control board 60 executes medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). The medal management is a process for managing the inserted game medals, and details thereof are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S37, the main control board 60 performs a process of updating the soft random number. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) to the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the hand lottery means 69. The soft random number is, for example, a 16-bit random number having a range of “0” to “65535”. As an updating method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

  In the next step S38, the main control board 60 executes a start switch check (M_START_CHK) and sets / clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 34. Details of the start switch check are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S39, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 34 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 34 has been operated (YES in step S39), the process proceeds to step S40, and when it is determined that the start switch 34 has not been operated (NO in step S39), the process returns to step S33. When it is determined in step S39 that the start switch 34 has been operated, the start switch acceptance permission flag is set in step S38 (the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is " 1 (permit) ”) is a prerequisite.

  Then, in step S40, the main control board 60 executes start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL). Details of acceptance of the start switch are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S41, the main control board 60 (winning lottery means 69) executes the winning lottery at the timing when the start switch 34 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 34 is received. The random number at the time of the lottery has been acquired in the start switch acceptance executed in step S40 (see step S491 in FIG. 53). Then, in step S41, the main control board 60 (winning lottery means 69) determines whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any winning combination, using the winning lottery table.

  Next, in step S42, the main control board 60 (reel control means 70) starts the rotation of the reel 39.

  Then, in step S43, the stop acceptance of the reel 39 is checked. Specifically, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 35 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 39 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 39. The reel 39 is controlled to stop at the determined stop position.

  Next, in step S44, the main control board 60 (reel control means 70) checks whether or not all reels 39 have stopped, and in step S45 determines whether or not all reels 39 have stopped. When it is determined in step S45 that all reels 39 are stopped (YES in step S45), the process proceeds to step S46, and when it is determined that at least one of the reels 39 is not stopped (NO in step S45), step Return to S43.

  In step S46, the main control board 60 (display determination means 71) determines display of the symbol. Specifically, the display determination means 71 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line, and updates the symbol combination flag (not shown) according to the stopped combination of symbols. To do.

  Further, in step S46, the value of the game medal payout number data "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" (not shown) is also updated. For example, when one winning combination is won and the game medal payout number data up to that point is "0", the data value is updated from "0" to "1".

  Next, in step S47, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. Specifically, it is determined that a symbol display error (symbol combination error) has occurred when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred (YES in step S47), the process proceeds to step S52, and non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an "E5" error is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol display error has not occurred (NO in step S47), the process proceeds to step S48.

  In addition, in order to cancel the "unrecoverable error" when it occurs, it is necessary to turn on / off the power and reset the set value. For example, when a non-recoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (setting key switch 12 is turned on), and the power is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range (setting value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 63 is cleared. Then, the set value is reset, and if there is no other error, the restoration process is performed.

  On the other hand, when a "recoverable error" such as a full error described later occurs, the error content is displayed and the processing is stopped, but it is not necessary to turn on / off the power or reset the set value. For example, when a hall clerk performs an error releasing operation (eliminating the cause of the error) and operates the setting change / reset switch 13, it is determined whether or not the error is released, and when it is determined that the error is released, , The stopped process is restarted.

  In step S48, the main control board 60 (payout means 72) executes a medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning, and pays out game medals corresponding to a winning combination. The details of payout of medals by winning are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S49, the main control board 60 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). Although detailed description is omitted, by the game end check process, the condition device flag and the replay operation state flag are cleared, the replay display LED (state display LED 48a) is turned off, or bonus operation management is performed. Further, in the game end check processing, processing such as determining a full detection signal by the full sensor and displaying a full error (“FE” error) when the signal is ON may be performed. When the process of step S49 ends, the process proceeds to step S50.

  In step S50, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of the game. This process is a process of setting control command data for transmitting to the sub control board 80 that one game has ended.

  Then, in the next step S51, the main control board 60 stores the control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 by executing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).

  When the process of step S51 ends, the main process of one game ends, so the main control board 60 returns to step S30 and performs the main process of the next game. The above is the main processing procedure (main routine) of the main processing.

  In the following, the subroutine during the main processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 54.

[4-2-1. Game start set]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a game start set (MS_GAME_SET). The "game start set" is a subroutine executed in step S32 during the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 35, first, in step S211, the main control board 60 sets a game standby display time. In the present embodiment, the "26846" interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds) is set as the game standby display time.

  When the game standby display time is set in step S211, the number of interrupts is counted (subtracted) from this point. Then, when the game standby display time becomes "0", the game medal payout number data is cleared (data of "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" is "0") in the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) (see step S35 of FIG. 34, FIG. 41). Will be). As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is "9", and the player finishes the game by operating the settlement switch 36 and finishes the game, about one minute after the game standby display time elapses. "00" (or "* 0", "**", etc. ("*" means extinguished)) is displayed. As a result, the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize the vacant table, so that the vacant table can be reduced.

  After the processing of step S211, the processing of step S212 is performed. Here, the process of steps S212 to S217 is a process of setting the state at the time of replay operation or the type 1 BB game based on the result of the previous game before starting the game.

  First, in step S212, the main control board 60 acquires data of a symbol combination display flag (symbol flag) (not shown). Specifically, the combination of symbols on the activated line after the reel 39 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data on the winning combination is stored in the register from the symbol combination display flag stored in the RWM 63.

  In the next step S213, an operation state flag "_FL_ACTION" is generated. Then, in step S214, the operating state flag is updated and stored. For example, at the time of winning the replay, in step S213, an operation state flag related to the replay is generated based on the data stored in step S212. Then, in step S214, the D0 bit of the operation state flag "_FL_ACTION" is set to "1 (operation)" and the operation state flag is stored (stored).

  In the next step S215, based on the data of the symbol flag acquired in step S212, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols of the replay is displayed (whether the replay is won). When it is determined that the combination of replay symbols is displayed (YES in step S215), the process proceeds to step S216, and when it is determined that it is not displayed (NO in step S215), the process proceeds to step S218.

  In step S216, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ). This process is a process of reading the number of game medals (the number of bets) bet in the previous game in which the replay was won. Details of reading the game medals are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S217, the automatic bet amount data is set. This processing updates the data "_NB_REP_MEDAL" (not shown) of the RWM 63 which stores the number of game medals to be automatically bet (automatic bet number) by the bet number of the previous game (replay winning game) read in step S216. Processing.

  After the state based on the result of the previous game is set by the processing of S212 to S217, the command relating to the game state is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by performing the processing of step S218 and step S219.

  In step S218, the output request of the operating state is set. Then, in step S219, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. Specifically, for example, information indicating that the replay is activated or the type 1 BB is activated is transmitted to the sub control board 80. In addition, in the processing of steps S218 to S219, in addition to the above-described information, information regarding the set value of the current game, information regarding the RT state of the current game, and the like may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  After the processing of step S219, the process proceeds to step S220, and the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) is executed. The details of the start of medal acceptance are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ).

  According to FIG. 36, in step S221, the main control board 60 reads the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the RWM 63, and stores the read value in a predetermined register (eg, A register). As described above with reference to FIG. 16, this value is the number of betted game medals (bet number).

  Then, in step S222, the main control board 60 checks the number of medals (the number of bets) stored in step S221. Specifically, when the register value of the A register is a value indicating “0” (that is, when there is no bet medal), the zero flag is set to “1”. On the other hand, if the register value of the A register is a value other than “0” (that is, if a bet medal exists), the zero flag is set to “0”.

  When the process of step S222 ends, the main control board 60 ends the reading of the game medals.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START).

  According to FIG. 37, first, in step S231, the main control board 60 clears the bet number data in the previous game by setting the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” to “0”.

  Next, in step S232, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning off the closing display LEDs (state display LEDs 48e to 48g). Specifically, the D5 to D7 bits of the inserted number display LED signal data "_PT_MEDAL_LED" are set to "0".

  In the next step S233, the main control board 60 initializes the game medal management flag. Specifically, the D0, D2 to D4, D6 and D7 bits of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" are set to "0".

  In the next step S234, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. Specifically, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” is read. Then, in a step S235, based on the reading in the step S234, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation is in progress.

  If the value of the D0 bit read in step S234 is "0 (not activated)", it is determined in step S235 that the re-game is not in progress (NO in step S235), and the process proceeds to step S246. In step S246, the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed to control the blocker 29 to be in the ON state (permitted position), and then the medal acceptance start process is ended. Therefore, when the re-game is not in operation, the blocker 29 is turned on to uniformly allow maintenance of game medals. The details of the blocker ON are shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the value of the D0 bit read in step S234 is "1 (operation)", it is determined in step S235 that the re-game is in operation (YES in step S235), and the process proceeds to step S236. That is, at the start of the medal acceptance shown in FIG. 37, the processing after step S236 corresponds to the automatic bet processing for the game medals during the re-game operation.

  In step S236, the waiting time at the time of re-game operation is set. In step S237, wait processing is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set the wait time to about 500 ms, the count value "237" of the number of interrupts is set, the count value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt, until "0" is reached. Perform wait processing.

  By providing the wait process of step S237, it is possible to prevent the replay display LED from being turned on (step S241) and the automatic betting of game medals (step S244) being performed immediately after the end of the game. Since the betting sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the command stored in steps S242 and S243, the output timing of this betting sound can also be adjusted by the wait process in step S237. Further, the wait time may be changed depending on the type of replay that won the prize.

  Although not shown in FIG. 15 and the like, in order to execute the wait process of step S237, the RWM 63 stores the maximum value of the number of interrupts counted in the wait process in the 1-byte timer storage area (eg, “237”). May have a 1-byte storage area for storing. If the maximum value of the number of interrupts counted in the wait processing exceeds "255" (for example, "300"), it cannot be stored in the 1-byte storage area, so the RWM 63 stores "300" in the 2-byte timer storage area. May be provided with a 2-byte storage area.

  After the end of the wait processing in step S237, in step S238, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the number of stored game medals (the number stored). Details of reading the stored number of sheets are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S239, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets read in step S238 reaches the limit number (50 sheets in the present embodiment). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” acquired by reading the stored sheet number in step S238 is a value indicating the limit sheet number “50”.

  When it is determined in step S239 that the number of stored sheets is the limit number (YES in step S239), the process proceeds to step S241. At this time, the blocker 29 is maintained in the OFF state (non-permitted position).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S239 that the number of stored sheets is not the limit number (NO in step S239), the process proceeds to step S240, and blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position). Then, the process proceeds to step S241. That is, when it is determined that the stored number is not the limit number, the maintenance of the game medals is permitted even during the re-game operation. It should be noted that if it is desired to prevent the maintenance of the game medals at all times during the re-game operation, the processes of steps S238 to S240 may be deleted.

  Then, in step S241, a lighting process of the replay display LED (state display LED 48a) is performed. Specifically, the D3 bit of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is set to "1 (lit)". The process of actually turning on the replay display LED is performed by the LED display control in the interrupt process described later (step S65 in FIG. 55).

  Then, in step S242, the main control board 60 performs an output request setting process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made to the sub control board 80, and in step S243, the control command set 1 ( R_CMD_SET) is executed.

  Then, in step S244, the main control board 60 executes one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC). The addition of one medal is a process of adding one game medal, but here means a process of automatically betting (adding) one game medal for automatic betting based on a replay winning. Details of the addition of one medal are shown in FIG.

  Then, in the next step S245, it is determined whether or not the bet number bet in step S244 has reached a predetermined limit number (specified number). Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the “game medal limit determination” of the D7 bit of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is “1 (limit)”. When it is determined that the bet number has not reached the predetermined limit number (NO in step S245), the process returns to step S244, and one medal addition (automatic bet) is executed again. When it is determined that the bet number has reached the predetermined limit number (YES in step S245), the medal receiving process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  In FIG. 37, the automatic bet processing (steps S244 to S245) is performed after the output request set during automatic bet (step S242) and the command transmission during automatic bet (step S243) are executed. The form is not limited to this, and for example, after the completion of the automatic betting process, the output request set during the automatic betting and the command transmission during the automatic betting may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 37, in order to automatically bet, for example, three game medals at once at the time of replay winning, a weight process for adding one game medal in automatic betting is not provided, but it is determined as NO in step S245. After that, weight processing may be added. In this case, since the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC) in step S244 is executed with the wait time interposed, the insertion number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” is sequentially updated, and the insertion display LED (state display LED 48g, The player can be made to see that the status display LED 48f and the status display LED 48e) are sequentially turned on.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing reading of the number of stored sheets (R_CREDIT_READ).

  According to FIG. 38, first, in step S251, the main control board 60 reads the stored number data. Specifically, the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stored in the RWM 63 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register).

  Next, in step S252, the main control board 60 performs a zero check of the value read in step S251. Specifically, when the value of the A register is a value indicating "0", the zero flag is set to "1". Then, after the processing of step S252, the processing for reading the number of stored sheets ends.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON).

  According to FIG. 39, first, in step S261, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker-OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” has elapsed. Specifically, when the timer value of the blocker OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” stored in the address “F026” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed. When it is determined that the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed while it is determined in step S261 that the blocker OFF monitoring time has not elapsed (NO in step S261), the process cannot proceed to the next process. (YES in step S261), the process proceeds to step S262.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 15, “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” is the rising edge of the “selector passage sensor signal” indicating that the passage sensor 28 is turned on by the detection of the game medal (the input port 2 rising data “ It is a 1-byte timer which is set to an initial value of "144" when the D7 bit of _PT_IN2_UP becomes "1") and thereafter decrements by "1" for each interrupt. Therefore, the processing after step S262 cannot be performed until the timer value of “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” becomes “0” after the 144 interrupt (about 322 ms) has elapsed.

  By controlling in this way, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment can prevent the “blocking of game medals” by the blocker 29. More specifically, the blocker 29 is configured to be displaced from the OFF state (non-permission position) to the ON state (permission position) immediately after the game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28 (selector passage sensor 28). There is a possibility that a game medal flowing down the game medal passage may be caught by the blocker 29, that is, so-called "pinching of game medal" may occur. For such a problem, in the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) of the present embodiment, it is sufficient time for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 ( More specifically, a timer for the blocker OFF monitoring time (about 322 ms) is set as a time sufficient to reach the predetermined position where the flow down to the hopper 50 is established beyond the position of the blocker 29, and the timer value is set. By not permitting the blocker 29 to shift from the OFF state to the ON state until is 0, it is possible to prevent "pinching of game medals".

  Since the blocker OFF-time monitoring time "_TM1_BLOFF_CHK" is a timer stored in a predetermined address "F026" of the RWM 63, the game can proceed even after the initial value is set in the timer.

  Next, in step S262, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption by interruption processing (timer interruption processing) (interruption inhibition). As described above, during execution of the main process, the timer interrupt process is entered every 2.235 ms, but after execution of the interrupt prohibition in step S262, the period until the interrupt prohibition is released in step S266 described later. , Control not to allow interrupts.

  Then, in step S263, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning on the blocker signal. Specifically, the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” stored in the address “F061” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (ON)”. The blocker signal set to ON in step S263 is not immediately output from the output port 62 (more specifically, the output port 3), but is output from the output port 3 by the interrupt process executed thereafter. .

  Next, in step S264, the main control board 60 clears the value of the closing monitoring counter. Specifically, the data of the closing monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK” stored in the address “F016” of the RWM 63 is set to “0”. As described above, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is “+1” when the game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and the value is “−1” when the insertion sensor 30 (the insertion sensor 30a and the insertion sensor 30b) is detected. Is a counter that repeats "+1" and "0" in a normal state. Here, for example, when the game medal is inserted while the blocker 29 is in the OFF state, only detection by the passage sensor 28 is performed (the game medal is not guided to the insertion sensor 30 side). The counter value keeps increasing. Such a situation can be reset by clearing the value of the injection monitoring counter in step S264.

  Next, in step S265, the main control board 60 turns on the flag indicating the blocker state. Specifically, the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored in the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (ON)”. Note that the blocker status of "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is different from the blocker signal of "_PT_BLK_HPM", which is information indicating that a game medal can be inserted, and interrupt processing when the data is "1". As a result, the input ready display LED (state display LED 48b) is controlled to be turned on.

  When the processing up to step S265 is completed, in step S266, the main control board 60 releases the interrupt prohibition performed in step S262, thereby allowing the interrupt by the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) and turning on the blocker. finish.

  By prohibiting the interrupt in the period from step S262 to S266 as described above, it is possible to control so that the timer interrupt process is not executed during the execution of the instruction (update of the RWM 63) executed in the period. As a result, an interrupt for controlling the state of the blocker 29 (transition from the non-permitted position to the permitted position) based on the blocker signal set in step S263 and the turn-on ready display LED based on the blocker state set in step S265. The interrupt for controlling lighting is executed by the same interrupt processing. That is, since the position control of the blocker 29 and the lighting control of the input ready display LED are realized by the interrupt processing at the same timing, the blocker 29 is placed between the OFF state / ON state and the display state of the input ready display LED. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency and expect an effect of not causing confusion to the player.

  Note that each process of steps S263 to S265 of FIG. 39 is called prevention of inconsistency between the state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the input ready display LED (securing of consistency) even if the execution order is appropriately changed. The effect can be obtained.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC).
The process of adding one medal shown in FIG. 40 is commonly used for each bet process such as a maintenance bet for game medals, an automatic bet based on the display of replay, and a stored bet based on the operation of the bet switch 33. Processing. Even if the bet processing executed in this way is different, the program capacity can be reduced by using the common processing (program).

  According to FIG. 40, first, in step S271, the main control board 60 reads the number of betted game medals (bet number). Specifically, the game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) described with reference to FIG. 36 is executed. By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the address “F06D” of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  In the next step S272, the bet number of the game medal read in step S271 is incremented by "1" and stored in the C register. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value, and the added A register value is stored (updated) in the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL".

  Then, in step S273, the main control board 60 performs processing for clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47. Specifically, the acquired number display data “_NB_PAY_LED” (not shown) stored in the RWM 63 is cleared. The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 47 is performed by the LED display control in the interrupt process (step S65 of FIG. 55).

  Next, in step S274, the main control board 60 generates lighting data of the turn-on display LEDs (state display LED 48g, state display LED 48f, state display LED 48e). The generation of the lighting data is executed by calculating the value of the A register, for example.

  In the next step S275, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the generation of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed. When it is determined that the generation of the lighting data for the number of input sheets is not completed (NO in step S275), the process returns to step S24 and the generation of the lighting data is continued. When it is determined that the generation of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets is completed (YES in step S275), the process proceeds to step S276.

  In step S276, the main control board 60 controls to store the lighting data of the inserted number display LED in the RWM 63. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the input number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED”. The process of actually turning on the inserted number display LED is performed by the LED display control (step S65 of FIG. 55) in the interrupt process.

  Then, in step S277, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number of coins. Here, the limit number of medals means the maximum value of the number of game medals that can be bet in the game (or the number of game medals that must be bet in the game), that is, the “specified number”. For example, if a maximum of 3 game medals can be bet in the normal game and a maximum of 2 game medals can be bet during the 1st class BB game, the maximum number of medals in the normal game is "3" and the 1st class BB game. The limit number of medals inside is "2".

  Next, in step S278, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. This process is the same as the process of step S271.

  Then, in step S279, it is determined whether or not the bet number read in step S278 is the limit number of game medals set in step S277. When it is determined that the number of bets is not the limit number of game medals (NO in step S279), the process of this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of game medals is the limit (YES in step S279), the process proceeds to step S280, and a medal limit flag (game medal limit determination) is set. In step S280, specifically, "1 (limit)" is stored in the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" stored in the address "F01E" of the RWM 63. After the processing of step S280, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

[4-2-2. Waiting for medal insertion]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP). The "wait for medal insertion" is a subroutine executed in step S35 during the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 41, first, in step S281, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 rising data "_PT_IN0_UP" is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S281), and the process proceeds to step S282. If the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not ON (NO in step S281), and the process proceeds to step S291.

  That is, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on (for example, the setting key is being inserted) in the game medal insertion waiting state, the setting confirmation mode is set, and the processes of steps S282 to S290 are executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the current setting value (confirmation by the administrator's visual inspection), and the setting value cannot be changed.

  In the present embodiment, since the determination in step S281 is made based on the rising data of the setting key switch 12 (input port 0 rising data), for example, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on during the game. Even if the determination in step S281 is made, since the rising data is OFF, the process does not shift to the setting confirmation mode after step S282. By doing so, the set value cannot be illegally confirmed. When such a point is not taken into consideration, based on the data indicating ON / OFF of the setting key switch 12 (specifically, D1 (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD”). The determination in step S281 (and step S286 described later) may be performed.

  In step S282, blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) is executed as a process for controlling the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permission position). By turning off the blocker 29, the game medal is returned from the payout opening 53 even if it is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26. The details of the blocker OFF are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S283, the main control board 60 performs an output request setting process for transmitting the control command at the time of starting the setting value display to the sub control board 80, and in the next step S284, the control command set 1 ( R_CMD_SET) is executed.

  Next, in step S285, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning on the set value display LED 66. By this processing, the set value display LED 66 can be turned on and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 66 is performed by the LED display control in the interrupt process (step S65 of FIG. 55).

  In the next step S286, the main control board 60 continues to determine whether or not the setting key switch signal is turned off. In step S286, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 falling data (not shown) has become "1". When the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not OFF (ON) (NO in step S286), and the process of step S286 is repeated. When the D1 bit becomes "1", it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S286), and the process proceeds to step S287.

  Then, in step S287, the main control board 60 executes a process of turning off the set value display LED 66. Then, it progresses to step S288.

  In step S288, the main control board 60 performs an output request setting process for transmitting a control command at the end of setting value display to the sub control board 80, and in the next step S289, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). To execute.

  In the next step S290, the main control board 60 executes the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) in order to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position).

  Next, in step S291, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game standby display time has elapsed (confirmation of start of game standby display). Specifically, by determining whether or not the value of the game standby display start time "_TM2_BACK_OFF" is "0", it is set to "_TM2_BACK_OFF" in step S211 of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) of FIG. It is determined whether or not the interruption (about 60 seconds) for "26846" has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S291 that the game standby display time has elapsed (YES in step S291), the process proceeds to step S292, a process for clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is executed, and then this flowchart process ends. Then, the process returns to the main process. The process of step S292 is the same as the process of step S273 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S291 that the game standby display time has not elapsed (NO in step S291), the process of this flowchart is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, according to the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) of the present embodiment, when the game is not played for a predetermined time (game standby display time, about 60 seconds), the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is displayed. However, the display of the replay display LED (status display LED 48a), the stored number display LED 45, and the insertion display LED (status display LED 48e to status display LED 48g) is controlled so as not to be cleared. By such control, even if the player does not play the game, the information regarding the continuation of the game continues to be displayed even if the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared after a predetermined time elapses. However, it is possible to prevent other players and persons involved in the hall from misunderstanding that the game is completely finished, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  Further, if the player continues to display the fact that the game medals have been won in the previous game on the acquired number display LED 47, even if the player finishes the game (leaks away after performing the settlement process etc.), another player It is not preferable because it may not make the players in the hall feel the end of the game (may feel that they may still play the game). Therefore, in this embodiment, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, as a situation other than the above in which the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared, for example, step S211 (see FIG. 35) of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) or step S292 of the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP). (See FIG. 41). In these cases, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when about 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared (displayed as "00"). By such control, for example, while the reels 39 are rotating (instruction function is not operating), or when all the reels 39 are stopped, the winning number is displayed (whether or not the winning combination is won). The display of the LED 47 is "00" (or "* 0", "**", etc. ("*" means extinguished)).

  Also, in step S273 (see FIG. 40) of adding one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC), the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared when the game medals are inserted (the insertion of bet medals, the maintenance insertion of game medals, and the automatic bet at the time of replay winning).

  In the present embodiment, the above control regarding the display clear of the acquired number display LED 47 is merely an example, and, for example, when the reel 39 is rotating or when all reels 39 are stopped, the winning combination is not won, or the game medal is displayed. At the time of insertion, nothing may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 47.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). In the blocker OFF processing, when the maintenance of the game medals becomes effective and the maintenance of the game medals becomes impossible (cannot be accepted), the blocker 29 is turned off (the non-permission position) and the game medals are inserted. Control is performed so as to form a "non-permitted game medal passage" for returning the game medal that has been maintained through the mouth 26 from the payout opening 53.

  According to FIG. 42, first, in step S301, the main control board 60 determines whether the blocker signal is OFF. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is “0 (OFF)”.

  When the value of the blocker signal is "1" in step S301, it is determined that the blocker signal is not OFF (NO in step S301), and the process proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, when the value of the blocker signal is "0", it is determined that the blocker signal is OFF (YES in step S301), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S302, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption by interruption processing (timer interruption processing) (interruption inhibition). As described above, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, but after execution of the interrupt prohibition in step S302, a period until the interrupt prohibition is released in step S305 described later. , Control not to allow interrupts.

  Then, in step S303, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the blocker signal. Specifically, the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” stored in the address “F061” of the RWM 63 is set to “0 (OFF)”. The blocker signal set to OFF in step S303 is not immediately output from the output port 62 (more specifically, the output port 3), but is output from the output port 3 by the interrupt process executed thereafter. .

  Next, in step S304, the main control board 60 turns off the flag indicating the blocker state. Specifically, the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored in the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “0 (OFF)”. The blocker status of "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is different from the blocker signal of "_PT_BLK_HPM", which is information indicating that a game medal can be inserted, and interrupt processing when the data is "0". As a result of the operation, the input ready display LED (state display PLED 48b) is controlled to be turned off.

  When the processing up to step S304 is completed, in step S305, the main control board 60 releases the interrupt prohibition performed in step S302, thereby permitting the interrupt by the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) and turning off the blocker. finish.

  By prohibiting the interrupt in the period from step S302 to S305 as described above, it is possible to control so that the timer interrupt process is not executed during the execution of the instruction (update of the RWM 63) executed in the period. As a result, an interrupt for controlling the state of the blocker 29 (transition from the permitted position to the non-permitted position) based on the blocker signal set in step S303, and the turn-on ready display LED based on the blocker state set in step S304 The interrupt for controlling turning off is executed in the same interrupt process. That is, since the position control of the blocker 29 and the turning-off control of the input ready display LED are realized by the interrupt processing at the same timing, the blocker 29 is placed between the OFF state / ON state and the display state of the input ready display LED. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency and expect an effect of not causing confusion to the player.

  It should be noted that the respective processes of steps S303 and S304 of FIG. 42 are effective in preventing inconsistency (ensuring consistency) between the state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the input ready display LED even if the execution order is changed. Can be obtained.

[4-2-3. Medal management]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). "Medal management" is a subroutine executed in step S36 during the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 43, first, in step S311, the main control board 60 determines whether the blocker signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is "1 (ON)". When the D2 bit is "1", it means that the blocker 29 forms the game medal passage in the permitted state. When the D2 bit is "1" in step S311, it is determined that the blocker signal is ON (YES in step S311), and the process proceeds to step S312. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0 (OFF)", it is determined that the blocker signal is not ON (NO in step S311), and the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S312, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the closing sensor signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the D5 bit (the closing sensor 2 signal) or the D6 bit (the closing sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”.

  If either the D5 bit or the D6 bit of "_PT_IN2_OLD" is "1" in step S312, it is determined that the insertion sensor signal is ON (YES in step S312), which means that the game medal is properly inserted. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S321, and a maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) is executed to perform a maintenance check process. Details of the care medal check are shown in FIGS. 44 and 45.

  If either the D5 bit or the D6 bit of "_PT_IN2_OLD" is "0" in step S312, it is determined that the closing sensor signal is not ON (NO in step S312), and the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S313, the main control board 60 checks whether or not it is possible to accept the bet operation by the bet switch 33 (the 1 bet switch 33a, the 3 bet switch 33b) and the adjustment operation by the adjustment switch 36. Set the request of. Then, in the next step S314, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.

  Next, in step S315, the main control board 60 determines whether the operation acceptance checked in step S314 is possible. When it is determined that it is possible (YES in step S315), the process proceeds to step S316. When it is determined that it is not possible (NO in step S315), the process of this flowchart is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  In the present embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S313 to S315, the operation of the corresponding operation switch (1 bet switch 33a, 3 bet switch 33b, the settlement switch 36) is performed before the bet process or the settlement process is performed. It is determined whether or not it is in a state in which acceptance is possible, and only when it is determined that it is in an acceptable state, the process shifts to the storage bet processing (MS_BET_IN) or game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET) processing described later. . Specifically, for example, by the processing of steps S313 to S315, the level data “_PT_IN1_OLD” and the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1 are read, and when they do not match, it is not possible to accept the operation in step S315. to decide.

  In step S316, the main control board 60 sets a confirmation request for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal. Here, the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1 is read.

  In the next step S317, based on the confirmation (reading) in step S316, it is determined whether or not one of the 1-bet switch 33a, the 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36 has a rising edge. Specifically, is any one of D4 bit (1 bet switch signal), D3 bit (3 bet switch signal), and D5 bit (settlement switch signal) of the read “_PT_IN1_UP” “1 (ON)”? Determine whether or not.

  More specifically, for example, by performing an AND operation on the read “_PT_IN1_UP” and the definition data set to “00111000 (B)”, the bits that are not to be determined (D0 to D2 bits, D6 bits, D7 bits) To clear. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0". If the calculation result is "0", it means that there is no rise of any signal to be judged (the operation of any of the 1 bet switch 33a, the 3 bet switch 33b, and the adjustment switch 36 is not changed) (step). (NO in S317), the process of this flowchart is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the calculation result is not "0", it means that there is a rise in any of the signals to be judged (the operation has changed in any of the 1 bet switch 33a, the 3 bet switch 33b, and the adjustment switch 36). Since this means (YES in step S317), the process proceeds to step S318.

  In step S318, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 34. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is set to "0".

  When the D0 bit of the game medal management flag is "0 (prohibited)", the game start LED (status display LED 48d) is shown to indicate that the start switch 34 is not valid (it is invalid even if it is operated). Turn off. On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the game medal management flag is "1 (permitted)", the game start LED (state display LED 48d) is turned on to indicate that the start switch 34 is valid. The process of actually turning off / on the game start LED is performed by the LED display control in the interrupt process (step S65 in FIG. 55).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of the 1 bet switch 33a, the 3 bet switch 33b, and the adjustment switch 36 has changed, the game medal management is performed in order to notify that the start switch 34 is not effective. After updating the data of the flag, processing (storage bet processing (MS_BET_IN) or game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET)) based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 33a, the 3 bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 (for example, the winning lottery processing) is executed in the main processing, and the stored bet processing and the game medal settlement are also executed in the main processing. Are configured to not occur at the same time. Specifically, for example, during the game medal settlement process, the winning combination lottery process based on the start switch 41 is not executed.

  In the next step S319, the main control board 60 sets a data confirmation request relating to the settlement switch signal. Specifically, for example, the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is read. Then, in step S320, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the adjustment switch signal has risen based on the “_PT_IN1_UP” read in step S319. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the D5 bit (settlement switch signal) of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)” or “0 (OFF)”.

  When the D5 bit of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1” in step S320, it is determined that the adjustment switch signal has risen (YES in step S320), the process proceeds to step S322, and game medal adjustment (M_MEDAL_RET) is executed. . Details of the game medal settlement are shown in FIG. 47.

  If the D5 bit of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “0” in step S320, it is determined that the adjustment switch signal does not rise (NO in step S320), in other words, the bet switch signal rises. Means that the storage bet process (MS_BET_IN) is executed in step S323. Details of the storage bet process are shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of the present embodiment, after it is determined in step S312 whether or not the data relating to the insertion sensor signal is ON, in step S317 or step S320, the bet switch signal or the settlement is performed. It is determined whether or not the data related to the switch signal is ON. Therefore, by preferentially checking the insertion of the physical game medal detected by the insertion sensor 30 over the bet switch 33 and the settlement switch 36, the effect of preventing the “swallowing of the game medal” can be expected.

  Note that the above-mentioned "priority check of insertion of a physical game medal detected by the insertion sensor 30 over the bet switch 33 and the settlement switch 36" means steps S33 to S39 in the main process of FIG. When it is in a loop and the blocker signal is ON, the interrupt processing updates the data of the RWM 63 related to each input port 61 (input ports 0 to 2), and the input sensor signal is ON, Moreover, when the settlement switch signal or the bet switch signal is turned on, the "care medal check (step S321)" is executed more than the "game medal settlement (step S322)" or the "reservation bet process (step S323)". Refers to the program sequence or program processing that is easily affected.

  Further, while the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with only one settlement switch 36 as a switch for executing the game medal settlement, as a switch for executing the storage bet process, the 1 bet switch 33a. And a three-bed switch 33b. Therefore, in step S320, if it is determined whether or not to execute the storage bet process, it is necessary to determine the rising data corresponding to each of the two switches (1 bet switch 33a and 3 bet switch 33b). I have to. This may complicate the process and increase the program capacity. Therefore, in the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of the present embodiment, as described above, in step S320, by confirming the rising data of the “one” settlement switch signal, the subsequent processing is executed (game medal settlement or accumulated bet processing). ) Is determined. By performing such processing, the processing is simplified and the program capacity is reduced.

[4-2-3-1. Care medal check]
44 and 45 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) showing the care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). Note that the notations [11] to [14] shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 show the correspondence between both drawings, and the overall flowchart of the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) is shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. Is shown.

  44 and 45, first, in step S331, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 34. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “0 (prohibited)”.

  Next, in step S332, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit (input sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1”. The closing sensor 1 corresponds to the closing sensor 30a, and the closing sensor 2 corresponds to the closing sensor 30b, but hereinafter, as a general rule, the terms "make sensor 1" and "make sensor 2" will be used. When it is determined that the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is ON (YES in step S332), the process proceeds to step S333, and when it is determined that the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is not ON (related to the closing sensor 2 signal). When the data is ON) (NO in step S332), the process proceeds to step S338.

  In step S333, the passage check time of the input sensor 1 (the interrupt count is 64, about 143 ms) is set. Here, when a game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 1, the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned ON, but thereafter, when the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not turned OFF even after a lapse of a predetermined time, Since a game medal may be clogged, the passage check time of the insertion sensor 1 is measured.

  Next, proceeding to step S334, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal are OFF, as in step S332. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are OFF (NO in step S334), the process according to this flowchart ends.

  Here, after the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is turned ON in step S332, it is rare that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is determined to be OFF in step S334. However, noise or the game medal selector 27 There is a case where the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is temporarily turned on due to the game medal being violent and is detected in step S332. However, even if such a rare phenomenon occurs, the process of step S334 prevents the process from proceeding to step S335 and thereafter. That is, even if such a phenomenon occurs, since it is determined that an error has occurred and no error notification is given, the game can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S334 that the data relating to the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal are not OFF (NO in step S334), the process proceeds to step S335.

  In step S335, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal are ON. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are ON (YES in step S335), the process proceeds to step S339, and when it is determined that the data is not ON (NO in step S335), step S336. Proceed to.

  In step S336, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is ON (YES in step S336), the process proceeds to step S337, and when it is determined that it is not ON (NO in step S336), the process proceeds to step S338.

  In step S337, the main control board 60 determines whether the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the time set in step S333 has exceeded a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed (YES in step S337), the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed (NO in step S337), the process returns to step S334.

  As described above, step S338 is a process performed when it is determined in step S332 or step S336 that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is not ON (NO in step S332, NO in step S336). The process of step S338 is also performed when NO is determined in step S341 described later or when NO is determined in step S345. In step S338, the main control board 60 sets a display request for an illegal passage error of the medal. The illegal medal passing error is referred to as "CP error" in the present embodiment, and when the illegal medal passing error occurs, a process of displaying "CP" on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the processing of step S338, the process proceeds to step S348.

  In step S348, a process for displaying an error corresponding to the situation until the step is shifted to (M_ERROR_DSP). Although detailed description of the error display (M_ERROR_DSP) is omitted, when the interrupt process is executed after the process is performed, the error display is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the LED display control (step S65 in FIG. 55). Is done. Specifically, for example, when the process proceeds from step S338 to step S348, an illegal medal passing error (CP error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S338, and “CP” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. Is displayed. Further, for example, when the process proceeds from step S347 to step S348, a medal retention error (CE error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S347, and “CE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. . Further, for example, when the process proceeds from step S351 to step S348, an abnormal medal insertion error (C1 error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S349, and “C1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. It

  On the other hand, as described above, when it is determined in step S335 that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are ON (YES in step S335), the process of step S339 is performed. In step S339, the main control board 60 sets the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 (the interrupt count is about 143 ms).

  Then, the process proceeds to the next step S340, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S340), the process proceeds to step S344, and when it is determined that the data is not ON (NO in step S340), the process proceeds to step S341.

  In step S341, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal are ON. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are ON (YES in step S341), the process proceeds to step S342. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are not ON (NO in step S341), the process proceeds to step S338. As described above, in step S338, a display request for the illegal passing error (CP error) of the medal is set, and in the subsequent step S348, processing for displaying the error is performed.

  In step S342, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage sensor 2 passage check time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S339 has exceeded a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed (YES in step S342), the process proceeds to step S347. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has not elapsed (NO in step S342), the process proceeds to step S343.

  In step S343, the main control board 60 determines whether the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 1 has elapsed (YES in step S343), the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed (NO in step S343), the process proceeds to step S340. Return.

  Next, step S344 is a process performed when it is determined in step S340 that the data relating to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S340). In addition, the process of step S344 is also performed when NO is determined in step S346 described later. In step S344, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal are OFF. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are OFF (YES in step S344), the process proceeds to step S349. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal are not OFF (NO in step S344), the process proceeds to step S345.

  In step S345, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S345), the process proceeds to step S346. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is not ON (NO in step S345), the process proceeds to step S338. As described above, in step S338, a display request for the illegal passing error (CP error) of the medal is set, and in the subsequent step S348, processing for displaying the error is performed.

  In step S346, the main control board 60 determines whether the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed (YES in step S346), the process proceeds to step S347. If it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has not elapsed (NO in step S346), the process returns to step S344.

  As described above, in step S347, when it is determined in S342 or step S346 that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed (YES in step S342, YES in step S346), or in step S343, the closing sensor 1 is checked. This process is performed when it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed (YES in step S343). In step S347, the main control board 60 sets a display request for a medal retention error. This medal retention error is an error for the data relating to the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal being in the ON state even after the passage check time has elapsed, and the game medals remaining in the game medal passage. The medal retention error is referred to as “CE error” in the present embodiment, and when the medal retention error occurs, a process of displaying “CE” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the process of step S347, the process proceeds to step S348, and a process for displaying a CE error (displaying "CE" on the acquired number display LED 47) is performed.

  Next, step S349 is a process performed when it is determined in step S344 that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF (YES in step S344). In step S349, the main control board 60 sets a display request for an abnormal medal insertion error. Here, the abnormal medal insertion error is an error indicating that there is an abnormal passage of the passage sensor 28, the insertion sensor 1 (the insertion sensor 30a), and the insertion sensor 2 (the insertion sensor 30b). The abnormal medal insertion error is referred to as “C1 error” in the present embodiment, and when the abnormal medal insertion error occurs, a process of displaying “C1” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed.

  However, in step S349, the display request for the abnormal medal insertion error (C1 error) is only set, and the processing for displaying the error is not performed. The process of displaying the C1 error is performed by proceeding to step S348 when NO is determined in step S351 described later. That is, if YES is determined in step S351, the process of displaying the C1 error is not performed. After the processing of step S349, the process proceeds to step S350.

  In step S350, the main control board 60 subtracts "1" from the value of the closing monitoring counter "_CT_SEN_CHK". As described above, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is “+1” when the game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and is “−1” when the game sensor is detected by the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. , Is a counter that repeats “+1” and “0” under normal conditions.

  In the next step S351, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the value of the closing monitoring counter is in the range of "0" to "3". If it is determined to be within the above range (YES in step S351), the process proceeds to step S352. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not within the above range (NO in step S351), the process proceeds to step S348, and processing for displaying an error is performed.

  Here, supplementing a specific case where NO is determined in step S351, as a case where the value of the insertion monitoring counter is “−1”, the insertion sensor 1 without the game medal passing the passage sensor 28, The case where it passes the injection sensor 2 is mentioned. In addition, as a case where the value of the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+4”, there is a case where the game medals that have passed the passage sensor 28 are accumulated before passing the insertion sensors 1 and 2. Each of these cases is classified as a medal abnormal insertion error (C1 error). Therefore, if NO in step S351, in step S348, a process for displaying an error is performed based on the display request for the abnormal coin insertion error (C1 error) set in step S349, and the number of acquired images is obtained. "C1" will be displayed on the display LED 47.

  In step S352, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number of coins. Then, in step S353, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. The processing of steps S352 to S353 is the same as the processing of steps S277 to S278 in FIG. Further, in step S354, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored sheet number.

  In the next step S355, the total number of bet numbers and accumulated number at present is calculated based on the processing results of step S353 and step S354.

Then, in a step S356, it is determined whether or not the insertion of the game medal is impossible after the insertion of the game medal is validated. Specifically, for example,
"Current bet number" + "Current stored number" -49 = "Medal limit number"
By calculating whether or not the relational expression is established, it is determined whether or not the insertion of the game medal is impossible.

  For example, when the current bet number is “2” and the current stored number is “50”, the calculation result on the left side of the above equation is “3”. Since this matches the limit number of medals “3” in the present embodiment, it is determined that it is impossible to further insert game medals after inserting the currently passed game medals.

  The process (calculation) for determining whether or not it is impossible to insert the game medal in step S356 is not limited to the above formula. Further, when the above calculation formula is adopted, the determination may be performed through a plurality of processes (calculations). For example, the address storing the "current bet number" is read into the HL register (process 1), the "current stored number" is read into the A register (process 2), and the data stored in the HL register (current bet number). Number) is added to the A register (process 3), the data (A register value) obtained by the addition in process 3 and the "medal limit number" are compared and calculated (process 4), and the result of the comparison calculation of process 4 is If it is “0”, it may be determined that “current bet number” + “current stored number” −49 = “medal limit number” (above formula). In other words, in step S356, “current bet number” + “current stored number” −49 = “medal limit number” is established by a predetermined calculation using at least the “bet number” and the “stored number”. It becomes possible to judge.

  When it is determined in step S356 that the game medal cannot be inserted (YES in step S356), the process proceeds to step S357, blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) is executed to turn off the blocker 29, and then the step Proceed to S358. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S356 that a game medal can be inserted (NO in step S356), step S357 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S358. That is, if YES is determined in the step S356, the blocker signal is turned OFF, and the blocker 29 in the OFF state forms the game medal passage in the non-permitted state. If NO is determined in the step S356, the blocker signal is The game medal passage in the permitted state, which is formed by the blocker 29 in the ON state, is maintained in the ON state.

  Then, in step S358, an output request for medal care is set, and in the next step S359, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed.

  In the next step S360, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the current bet number has reached a predetermined limit number (upper limit number). When it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number (NO in step S360), the process proceeds to step S361, and one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) shown in FIG. 40 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number is the limit number (YES in step S360), the process proceeds to step S362, and one stored number is added (MS_CREDIT_ADD). Details of adding one stored sheet are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the addition of one stored sheet (MS_CREDIT_ADD).

  According to FIG. 46, first, in step S371, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number read (R_CREDIT_READ). As described with reference to FIG. 38, when the number of stored sheets is read, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) and zero check is performed.

  Next, in step S372, the main control board 60 adds “1” to the number of stored sheets stored in the A register in step S371.

  Then, in the next step S373, the A register value (reserved number data) after the addition in step S372 is stored in the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stored in the RWM 63, and the process of this flowchart ends. In step S373, the value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored in "_NB_CREDIT_LED".

[4-2-3-2. Game medal settlement]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET).

  According to FIG. 47, first, in step S381, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker ON-time monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed. Specifically, when the timer value of the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” stored in the address “F027” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed, and is other than “0”. When, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has not elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S381 that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed (YES in step S381), the process proceeds to step S382. On the other hand, when it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has not elapsed (NO in step S381), the process of this flowchart ends. That is, the main control board 60 does not execute the following settlement process until the blocker ON monitoring time elapses. By such control, an effect of preventing "swallowing of game medal" can be obtained. The details will be described after explaining all the processes of this flowchart.

  In step S382, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of settlement. Specifically, the information “0444 (H)” indicating that the settlement is started is stored in the DE register.

  In the next step S383, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the re-game operation is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” stored in the address “F01F” of the RWM 63 is “1 (operation)”. When it is determined that the re-game operation is in progress (YES in step S383), the process proceeds to step S394, and when it is determined that the re-game is not in operation (re-game non-operation) (NO in step S383), It proceeds to step S384.

  In step S384, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the address “F06D” of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Then, in step S385, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a game medal (betting game medal) to be used for the game. Specifically, it is determined whether the A register value stored in step S384 is other than "0". When the A register value is "0", it is determined that there is no game medal to be used for the game (NO in step S385), and the process proceeds to step S394. When the A register value is other than "0", it is determined that there is a game medal to be used for the game (YES in step S385), and the process proceeds to step S386.

  In step S386, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF), and in the next step S387, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). By this processing, the information (control command relating to the output request at the time of settlement start) “0444 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S382 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S388, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the address “F06D” of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S389, the main control board 60 executes one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) for paying out one game medal. Details of paying out one medal are shown in FIGS. 48 and 49.

  Then, in step S390, the insertion display LED (state display LED 48e to state display LED 48g) displays a subtraction of one sheet. Specifically, a calculation for shifting the data of the inserted number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” stored at the address “F060” of the RWM 63 to the left is performed.

  For example, when the bet number is "3", the inserted number display LED signal data "_PT_MEDAL_LED" becomes "11100000 (B)" (D5 bit to D7 bit are "1"). At this time, when the left shift operation of step S390 is performed, it becomes "11000000 (B)", which corresponds to the inserted number display LED signal data when the bet number is "2" (D6 bit, D7 bit are "1"). )). Further, when the left shift operation is further performed, it becomes "10000000 (B)", which corresponds to the inserted number display LED signal data when the bet number is "1" (D7 bit is "1").

  That is, every time one game medal is paid out by executing one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) in step S389, the left shift calculation of step S390 is performed to change the lighting state of the inserted number display LED to the bet number “3”, It can be "2" or "1". In other words, "3BET (status display LED 48g)", "2BET (status display LED 48f)", and "1BET (status display LED 48e)" can be turned off sequentially (see FIG. 7).

  Next, in step S391, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the address “F06D” of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Then, in step S392, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a game medal (betting game medal) to be used for the game, as in step S385 described above. When it is determined that there is no game medal to be used for the game (NO in step S392), the process returns to step S388, and the processes of steps S388 to S392 are repeated until the bet number becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a game medal to be used for the game (YES in step S392), the process proceeds to step S393.

  In step S393, the main control board 60 clears the medal limit flag. Specifically, the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is cleared (set to “0”). After the processing of step S393, the process proceeds to step S402.

  Step S394 is a process executed when it is determined in step S383 that the re-game is in operation (YES), or when it is determined in step S385 that there is no game medal to be used for the game (NO). . In step S394, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored sheet number. By this processing, the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Then, in the next step S395, it is determined whether or not there are accumulated medals. Specifically, when the A register value stored in step S394 is "0", it is determined that there is no stored medal, and when the A register value is not "0", it is determined that there is a stored medal. If it is determined in step S395 that there are accumulated medals (YES in step S395), the flow advances to step S396 to start the process for adjusting the accumulated medals. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S395 that there is no stored medal (NO in step S395), there is no game medal to be settled, so the processing of this flowchart ends.

  In step S396, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF), and in the next step S397, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). By this processing, the information (control command relating to the output request at the time of settlement start) “0444 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S382 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S398, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored sheet number. By this processing, the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S399, the main control board 60 executes one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY). As described above, details of paying out one medal are shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. Further, in step S400, the main control board 60 executes subtraction of one stored sheet number (M_CREDIT_DEC) for subtracting one sheet from the stored sheet number. Details of subtracting one stored sheet are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S401, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the settlement of the stored medals is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the A register (the stored number data after subtraction) is "0" by executing the one-reserved number subtraction in step S400. Instead of the A register value, the judgment may be made based on the data stored in the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED”. When the stored number data after subtraction is other than "0", it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals is not completed (NO in step S401), the process returns to step S398, and the stored number after subtraction is "0". Until (the stored medals are exhausted), the processes of steps S398 to S401 are repeated. On the other hand, when the stored number data after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals is completed (YES in step S401), and the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of the settlement. Specifically, the information “0445 (H)” indicating that the settlement is completed is stored in the DE register.

  Then, in step S403, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). By this processing, the information (control command relating to the output request at the time of settlement) “0445 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S402 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63. After the end of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, and the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position).

  As described above, the main control board 60 executes the game medal adjustment (M_MEDAL_RET), but in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the blocker ON-time monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed (passed in step S381). In this case, by executing the settlement process, the effect of preventing "swallowing of game medals" due to the operation of the settlement switch 36 can be obtained. The reason will be described in detail below.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 15, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” measures the waiting time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position). This is a 1-byte timer for "_TM1_BLON_CHK" and the initial value of "_TM1_BLON_CHK" is set to "1" when the D7 bit of input port 2 rising data "_PT_IN2_UP" becomes "1" when the selector passage sensor signal rises. "45" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, the control for changing the blocker 29 from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position) is not permitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 and the passage sensor 28 detects the game medal in the game medal selector 27, the blocker ON monitoring time is set and the predetermined time (45 The blocker 29 cannot be changed to the OFF state (non-permission position) until about 101 ms of interruption has elapsed. Then, the predetermined time of the blocker ON monitoring time is a sufficient time for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, the blocker 29 Is sufficient time to pass through and be detected by the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b). In other words, the time difference between the initial value "45" and the final value "0" of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON, the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 is detected by the insertion sensor 30 (30a, 30b). It is set to be longer than the time required to complete.

  Then, in step S281 of the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET), the settlement process after step S282 is not executed until the blocker ON monitoring time set as described above elapses. Even if 36 is operated, the game medals are not settled.

  Here, if the control of step S281 is not performed (that is, the settlement process can be executed without making a determination based on the blocker ON monitoring time), the game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 (passage) When the settlement switch 36 is operated while the game medal detected by the sensor 28 is passing through the game medal selector 27, the output request at the start of settlement is set as shown in FIG. 47 (step S382), By executing the blocker OFF and the control command set 1 (steps S386, S387, S396, S397), preparation for starting the settlement of bet medals or accumulated medals is performed. As a result, the insertion process (maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK)) based on the insertion of the game medal is not executed.

  At this time, even if the insertion process is not executed, if the inserted game medals are returned from the payout opening 53 through the “non-permitted game medal passage” formed with the blocker OFF, the player There is no disadvantage to. However, if the control for changing the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permission position) is not in time, the inserted game medals are stored in the hopper 50 without being inserted. In other words, the "swallowing of game medals" occurs due to the operation of the settlement switch 36, which causes a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, until the predetermined time elapses after the blocker ON monitoring time is set (when the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”), the adjustment switch By not allowing execution of the settlement process based on the operation of 36 (the process after step S282 of the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET)), the game medal thrown immediately before the operation of the settlement switch 36 is inserted. The treatment is carried out surely and then the hopper 50 is accommodated. In other words, in this case, "swallowing game medals" due to the operation of the settlement switch 36 does not occur.

  To summarize the above, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the operation of the settlement switch 36 when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”). By making it possible to execute a predetermined process (settlement process), it is possible to prevent a game medal from being swallowed even when the settlement switch 36 is operated under a situation where a game medal has been inserted.

  More specifically, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the settlement switch 36 is operated under the condition that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the stored medal (or the bet medal) ) Payment is possible.

  Further, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the settlement switch 36 is operated, when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the stored medal (or the bet medal). ) Payment is possible.

  In other words, in other words, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is not the specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”), the adjustment switch 36 operates. By not performing the predetermined process (settlement process) based on the operation, it is possible to prevent the game medal from being swallowed even when the settlement switch 36 is operated while the game medal is being inserted. it can.

  More specifically, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the settlement switch 36 is operated under a situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is other than “0”, the stored medals (or the bet I can't settle medal.

  Further, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the settlement switch 36 is operated, when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”, the stored medal (or the bet medal). ) Can not be paid.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) showing the payout of one medal (M_1MEDAL_PAY). Note that the notations [21] to [25] shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 show the correspondence between the two drawings, and the entire medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) is shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. A flow chart is shown.

  According to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, first, in step S411, the main control board 60 sets error undetected. That is, the state where no error is detected is set as the initial state.

  Next, in step S412, the main control board 60 sets a display request for a medal clogging error. Here, the medal clogging error is an error indicating that the gaming medals are clogged in the gaming medal passage or the like. The token clogging error is referred to as “HP error” in the present embodiment, and when the token clogging error occurs, a process of displaying “HP” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed.

  Next, in step S413, the main control board 60 determines whether an error has been detected. When it is determined that an error is detected (YES in step S413), the process proceeds to step S414, error display (M_ERROR_DSP) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S415 at another place. The error display (M_ERROR_DSP) has been described in step S348 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S413 that no error is detected (NO in step S413), the process proceeds to step S415.

  In step S415, the main control board 60 sets the control time of the game medal payout device 49 (game medal payout device control time). Specifically, "2686" (2686 interrupt corresponds to about 6000 ms) is set to the 2-byte timer of the game medal payout device control time "_TM2_HE_CHK" stored in the addresses "F028" to "F029" of the RWM63. , Starts counting the timer (control time). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, in the present embodiment, when the timing of “_TM2_HE_CHK” is started, the time until the timer value becomes “0” (that is, about 6 seconds described above). If the game medals are not paid out from the game medal payout device 49 by the time of () elapses, it will be determined as a medal empty error. In other words, based on the timer value of “_TM2_HE_CHK”, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a medal empty error.

  Next, in step S416, the main control board 60 performs a process for driving the hopper motor 51. Specifically, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is set to “1 (ON)”. By this processing, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the output port 3 becomes "1" at the time of the next interrupt processing.

  Next, in step S417, the main control board 60 reads the game medal payout device control time "_TM2_HE_CHK" set in step S415. Then, in step S418, it is determined whether or not the control time has elapsed depending on whether or not the timer value read in step S417 is "0". When the timer value is "0", it is determined that the control time has elapsed (YES in step S418), and the process proceeds to step S432. On the other hand, when the timer value is other than "0", it is determined that the control time has not elapsed (NO in step S418), and the process proceeds to step S419.

  In step S419, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (payout sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”. When it is determined that it is ON (YES in step S419), the process proceeds to step S420, and when it is determined that it is not ON (NO in step S419), the process returns to step S417.

  In step S420, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 1 (for example, 46 interrupts, about 102.8 ms), and starts measuring the timer (detection time). Specifically, "46" is stored in "_TM1_PAY" of the address "F023" and is updated (subtracted) by "1" by the timer interrupt process.

  Next, in step S421, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal clogging is detected. If it is determined that a medal jam has been detected (YES in step S421), the flow advances to step S412 to set a medal jam error display request as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clogging of medals is not detected (NO in step S421), the process proceeds to step S422.

  In step S422, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (payout sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”. When it is determined that it is ON (YES in step S422), the process proceeds to step S423, and when it is determined that it is not ON (NO in step S422), the process returns to step S417.

  In step S423, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (payout sensor 1 signal) and the D3 bit (payout sensor 2 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” are “1 (ON)”. When both the D3 bit and the D4 bit are "1", it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal are ON (YES in step S423), and the process proceeds to step S424. If at least one of the D3 bit and the D4 bit is not "1", it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal are not ON (NO in step S423), and the process returns to step S421. .

  In step S424, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 2 and starts measuring the timer (detection time). Although not shown, the 1-byte timer storage area of the RWM 63 may have a storage area for storing the number of interrupts (eg, “23”) corresponding to the detection time.

  Next, in step S425, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the clogging of medals is detected, as in step S421. If it is determined that a medal jam has been detected (YES in step S425), the flow advances to step S412 to set a display request for a medal jam error. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clogging of medals is not detected (NO in step S425), the process proceeds to step S426.

  In step S426, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether the D3 bit (payout sensor 2 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “0 (OFF)”. If it is determined to be OFF (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427, and if it is determined not to be OFF (NO in step S426), the process returns to step S425.

  In step S427, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. If it is determined to be invalid (YES in step S427), the process returns to step S417, and if it is determined to be invalid (NO in step S427), the process proceeds to step S428.

  In step S428, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (payout sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “0 (OFF)”. If it is determined to be OFF (YES in step S428), the process proceeds to step S429, and if it is determined not to be OFF (NO in step S428), the process returns to step S425.

  In step S429, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the remaining payout amount (count value). Next, in step S430, it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. When it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S430), the process proceeds to step S431, and when it is determined that the medal payout is not completed (NO in step S430), the process of this flowchart is ended.

  In step S431, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 51. Specifically, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is set to “0 (OFF)”. By this processing, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the output port 3 becomes "0" at the next interrupt processing. After the processing of step S431, the main control board 60 ends the processing of this flowchart.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S418 that the game medal payout device control time has elapsed (YES in step S418), the process of step S432 is performed.

  In step S432, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 51, as in step S431. Then, in the next step S433, similarly to step S420, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set and the timer (detection time) starts counting.

  Next, in step S434, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. The specific process is the same as, for example, step S419. When it is determined in step S434 that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON (YES in step S434), the process proceeds to step S414. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is not ON (NO in step S434), the process proceeds to step S435.

  In step S435, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the detection time of the dispensing sensor 1 that has started time measurement in step S433 (or step S420) has passed a predetermined time, that is, whether or not the timer value has become “0”. To judge. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S435), the process proceeds to step S436, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S435), the process returns to step S434.

  Here, when YES is determined in step S435, the payout sensor 1 wins the game medal at the timing when the control time of the game medal payout device 49 has elapsed, even though the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has elapsed. It means that it is not detected, that is, the game medal is not paid out. Therefore, in step S436, a display request for a medal empty error is set. Here, the empty medal error is referred to as “HE error” in the present embodiment, and when the empty medal error occurs, a process of displaying “HE” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the processing of step S436, the process proceeds to step 413.

  As described above, the main control board 60 performs the process of paying out one game medal.

  FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing subtraction of the number of stored sheets by one (M_CREDIT_DEC).

  According to FIG. 50, first, in step S441, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number read (R_CREDIT_READ). As described with reference to FIG. 38, when the number of stored sheets is read, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) and zero check is performed.

  Next, in step S442, the main control board 60 subtracts "1" from the number of stored sheets stored in the A register in step S441. At this time, the data after the subtraction is converted into a decimal number, and the converted data is stored in the A register.

  Then, in the next step S443, the A register value (reserved sheet number data) stored after the subtraction in step S442 is stored in the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stored in the RWM 63, and the processing of this flowchart ends. In step S443, the data converted into a decimal number in step S442 is stored in "_NB_CREDIT_LED".

[4-2-3-3. Storage bet processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the storage bet process (MS_BET_IN).

  According to FIG. 51, first, in step S451, the main control board 60 reads the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" to turn on the medal limit flag ("1 (limit)". )) Is determined. When it is determined that the medal limit flag is ON (YES in step S451), it means that the bet number is already the maximum number, and thus the stored bet process according to this flowchart ends. That is, even if the operation of the bet switch 33 is detected in step S320 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. 43 and the process shifts to this flowchart (NO from step S320 to step S323), the bet number is already the maximum. If it is the number of sheets, the storage bet process is not performed and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the medal limit flag is on (YES in step S451), the process proceeds to step S452, and "1" is set as the bet (insertion) required number. Specifically, "1" is stored in the B register.

  Next, in step S453, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (whether or not it has risen). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is "1 (ON)". When it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (YES in step S453), the process proceeds to step S458, and when it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a is not operated (NO in step S453), the process proceeds to step S454.

  Note that, in the processing performed before step S453 (steps S317 and S320 in FIG. 43), since the operation of any of the bet switches 33 is detected, if the determination at step S453 is NO, the 3 bet switch 33b is It means that it was judged that it was operated.

  In step S454, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number of coins. For example, in the normal game, the limit number of medals "3" is stored in the C register.

  Then, in the next step S455, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in the A register. In step S454, the address "F06D" of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" is stored in the HL register.

  Next, in step S456, the main control board 60 sets the required bet number. Specifically, first, the C register value is stored in the A register. When the limit number of medals is set to "3" as described in step S454, the A register value is "3". Further, the data (bet number) at the address indicated by the HL register is subtracted from the A register value (medal limit number), and the result is stored in the A register. In the above example, if the bet number (the number of game medals already bet) is "1", the A register value is updated to "2". The value calculated by such calculation (A register value) becomes the number of game medals to be newly added as a bet.

  Next, in step S457, the value calculated in step S456 is set as the bet-requested number as a process for correcting the bet-requested number. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the B register.

  The processes of steps S451 to S457 are summarized. In step S452, the required bet number is set to "1" in the B register, and when the 1 bet switch 33a is operated (when YES is determined in step S453), the set value is set. The number of bets requested is left as it is (that is, the B register value is "1"), while the number of game medals to be newly added as a bet is set when the 3 bet switch 33b is operated (when NO is determined in step S453). The calculation is performed in step S456, and the calculation result is reset to the bet request number in step S457 (the B register value is set to "2" in the above example).

  Next, in step S458, the main control board 60 executes the stored sheet number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored sheet number. By this processing, the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Then, in step S459, it is determined whether or not there are accumulated medals. Specifically, when the A register value stored in step S458 is "0", it is determined that there is no stored medal, and when the A register value is not "0", it is determined that there is a stored medal. When it is determined in step S459 that there are accumulated medals (YES in step S459), the process proceeds to step S460, and when it is determined in step S459 that there are no accumulated medals (NO in step S459), the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S460, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (whether or not it has risen). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is "1 (ON)". When it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (there is a rising edge) (YES in step S460), the process proceeds to step S462 through step S461, and it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has not been operated (no rising edge). If so (NO in step S460), the process proceeds to step S462 without performing step S461.

  In step S461, the main control board 60 clears the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal. Specifically, the process of setting the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" to "0" is executed. That is, when the operation of the 1 bet switch 33a is detected in step S460, the rising bet data is cleared, and then the stored bet process of step S462 and thereafter is executed.

  Here, the reason for clearing the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal (rising data of the 1-bet switch 33a) in step S461 as described above will be described in detail below.

  First, as described above, the rising data of the input ports 0 to 2 is generated and stored by the interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, when the bet process is executed, a process of clearing the rising data (1 bet switch signal of “_PT_IN1_UP”) related to the 1 bet switch 33a generated and stored by the interrupt process is executed in the main process. Here, when the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 33a is not cleared, the rising data "1" related to the 1-bet switch 33a is maintained until the interrupt process is executed again. In such a case, before the next interrupt process is executed and the rising data relating to the 1 bet switch 33a is updated to "0", the bet switch 33 is set in step S317 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. When the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) is executed again after it is determined that there is a rise of 1 bet switch signal, the 1 bet switch signal has 1 The storage bet process is executed. That is, at this time, when the player operates the 1 bet switch 33a to bet one game medal, there is a possibility that two or three game medals will be bet continuously.

  In order to avoid such an inconvenience, in the present embodiment, when there is a stored medal, the rising data related to the 1 bet switch 33a is cleared before starting the stored bet processing after step S462.

  In the present embodiment, only the rising data related to the 1 bet switch 33a is cleared, and when the 3 bet switch 33b is operated, the rising data related to the 3 bet switch 33b (the 3 bet switch signal of "_PT_IN1_UP") is cleared. The processing to do is not executed. The reason is as follows.

  In the present embodiment, when three stored medals are bet based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 33b, the medal limit flag is set in the one-medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) executed in step S466 to be described later. (Step S280 in FIG. 40). By performing the control in this manner, the rising data "1" of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is temporarily stored until the interrupt process is executed next, similarly to the specific example in the description regarding the clearing of the 1-bet switch signal. Even if it is determined that the bet switch 33 has risen in step S317 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. 43 (YES) and the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) is executed again, the above-mentioned step S451. When it is determined that the medal limit flag is ON (YES), the storage bet process is not executed.

  Further, for example, when the bet number before the 3 bet switch 33b is operated is “0” and the stored number is “2”, the bet number becomes “2” based on the operation of the 3 bet switch 33b. . At this time, since the bet number has not reached the limit number, the medal limit flag does not become "1". In this state, even if the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is not cleared and the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) is executed again before the next interrupt process is executed, “NO” in step S451. However, since it is determined to be "NO" in step S459, the processing of step S460 and thereafter is not executed.

  From the above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unexpected storage bet as in the specific example of the 1-bet switch signal without clearing the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b. That is, in the present embodiment, it is only necessary to clear the rising data relating to at least the 1 bet switch 33a, and it is not always necessary to clear the rising data relating to the 3 bet switch 33b.

  However, if the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 33b is left as "1", the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is "1" until the interrupt process is executed next time. It is certain that the storage bet process will be executed (shift to the process of FIG. 51). Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid this, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal may also be cleared. Specifically, the processing of step S460 may be replaced with the "determination of whether or not the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal is present", and may be the processing of clearing the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal. The process of clearing the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is a process of setting the D3 bit of the rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) of the input port 1 to "0". Further, as another method, a process of clearing one address "F00B" of the RWM 63 storing the rising data of the input port 1 may be adopted.

  Further, another method may be adopted as a method of clearing the "rising data of the 1 bet switch signal" or the "rising data of the 3 bet switch signal". Taking the "rising data of 1 bet switch signal" as an example, after determining whether or not the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is "1 (ON)", Wait until at least one interrupt process is executed until it is determined whether the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is "1 (ON)". You may make it perform a process. By doing this, the next interrupt process is executed during the wait process under the condition that the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" is "1 (ON)". As a result, the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data "_PT_IN1_UP" becomes "0 (OFF)", so that the "1 bet switch signal rising data" can be surely cleared. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of bets from being made when the 1 bet switch is operated once.

  Returning to the description of each step in the storage bet process.

  In step S462, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the stored number read in step S458 is equal to or larger than the bet request number set in step S452 or step S457. Specifically, a process of subtracting the B register value (the requested bet number) from the A register value (the number of stored sheets) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0” or more. When the above calculation result indicates "0" or more, it is determined that the number of stored sheets is the required bet number or more (YES in step S462), and the process proceeds to step S464. On the other hand, when the above calculation result is less than “0”, it is determined that the number of stored sheets is not the required bet number (NO in step S462), the process proceeds to step S464 through step S463.

  In step S463, the main control board 60 sets the number of stored game medals. This process is a process of separately setting the total number of stored sheets to the additional number. That is, when it is determined to be NO in step S462, it means that the number of stored sheets is less than the number of bet sheets. Therefore, processing for setting the total number of stored sheets as the bet addition number is performed. Specifically, the A register value (the number of stored sheets) is stored in the B register. After the processing of step S463, the process proceeds to step S464.

  Here, the processes up to the above step S463 regarding the bet addition number will be summarized.

  When YES is determined in the step S453 (when the 1 bet switch 33a is operated), the bet request number “1” set in the step S452 is stored in the B register as the bet addition number. If, for example, the bet request number "3" is set in step S457 and it is determined YES in step S462 (there is more than the bet request number), the bet request number "3" is set as the bet addition number B. Stored in register. Further, for example, when the bet required number “3” is set in step S457, but the stored number is “2”, it is determined as NO (the stored number is less than the bet required number) in step S462, and step S463. By the process of "2", "2" is stored in the B register as the bet addition number.

  As described above, the bet addition number (the required bet number) refers to the number actually bet based on the effect result when the bet switch 33 is operated.

  In step S464, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the time of storage bet. Specifically, the control command data (for example, “10 (H)”) is stored in the D register, and the B register value is stored in the E register. Here, the D register value becomes a control command indicating that the bet is accumulated, and the E register value becomes a control command indicating the bet addition number.

  Next, in step S465, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). Specifically, the process of writing the control command data (DE register value) in the control command buffer is performed.

  Then, in step S466, the main control board 60 executes the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC) shown in FIG. When the one-medal addition process is executed, "1" is added to the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL".

  Next, in step S467, the main control board 60 executes subtraction of one stored sheet (M_CREDIT_DEC) to subtract one stored sheet. Details of subtracting one stored sheet are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S468, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the required number of bets have been completed. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the B register value (the required bet number), and it is determined whether the B register value after the subtraction is "0". When the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the bet of the requested number has been completed (YES in step S468), and the process proceeds to step 472. On the other hand, when the B register value after the subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the bet of the requested number has not ended (NO in step S468), and the process proceeds to step S469.

  In step S469, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). Then, in step S470, the waiting time for the storage bet is set. Specifically, for example, "46" is set as the count value of the number of interrupts. Then, in step S471, "1" is subtracted from the count value for each interrupt, and wait processing is executed until the count value becomes "0". After the wait process is completed, the process returns to step S466. The waiting time at the time of betting in step S470 may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the 1-byte timer storage area (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 59) of the RWM 63.

  The process for controlling the blocker 29 in the OFF state in step S469 is that the weight process is set when repeating the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC), and the game medals are maintained during this weight process. This is to avoid "swallowing of game medals" when they are thrown.

  As described above, when betting two or more game medals, the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC) in step S466 and the weighting process in step S471 are repeated. By repeating the process with the weight process sandwiched in this way, for example, when three game medals are bet based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 33b, three bets will be bet in an instant (insertion display LED (instantaneous). Instead of the status display LED 48e to the status display LED 48g being turned on), the insertion display LEDs may be additionally turned on in order every time one bet is placed.

  Then, finally, when the main control board 60 determines in step S468 that the required number of bets have been finished (YES in step S468), the main control board 60 controls the blocker 29 to be in the ON state (permitted position) in step 472. , Blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed. Then, the process of this flowchart ends. By performing the process of step S472, the blocker 29 is turned on after the process of the storage bet, so that the game medal can be care-loaded.

  In FIG. 51, after the rising data for the 1-bet switch 33a is cleared in step S461, the one-medal addition process is repeated in steps S466 to S471 until the bet-added number becomes "0". The execution order of may be reversed. Further, in the present embodiment, the rising data for the bet switch 33 (particularly, the 1 bet switch 33a) may be cleared before the next bet process (reserved bet process again) is executed.

[4-2-4. Start switch check]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start switch check (M_START_CHK). The "start switch check" is a subroutine executed in step S38 in the main process shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 52, first, in step S481, the main control board 60 checks for a sensor abnormality relating to insertion or withdrawal. Specifically, any one of the D4 bit (CH error), D5 bit (C0 error), and D6 bit (H0 error) of the sub notification flag 2 “_FL_SUB_INF2” stored at the address “F013” of the RWM 63 is “1 ( When detected) ”is indicated. If any of the D4 to D6 bits is "1", error display (M_ERROR_DSP) processing is executed based on the detected error. The error display (M_ERROR_DSP) is as described above in step S348 of FIG.

  Next, in a step S482, it is determined whether or not (the bet number) matches the specified number according to the gaming state. When it is determined that the bet number matches the specified number according to the gaming state (YES in step S482), the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number does not match the specified number according to the gaming state (NO in step S482), it means that the operation of the start switch 34 cannot be accepted. The process ends and the process returns to step S33 in the main process (FIG. 34).

  In step S483, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed. Specifically, when the timer value of the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” stored in the address “F027” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed, and is other than “0”. When, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has not elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S483 that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed (YES in step S483), the process proceeds to step S484. On the other hand, when it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has not elapsed (NO in step S483), the process proceeds to step S487. Although step S487 will be described later, when it is determined NO in step S483, a process for accepting the operation of the start switch 34 (specifically, setting of a start switch acceptance permission flag in step S486 described later) is performed. Without this, the processing of this flowchart is ended. That is, in the main control board 60, the operation of the start switch 34 is not validated (not accepted) until the blocker ON monitoring time elapses, and the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 is not executed. By such control, an effect of preventing "swallowing of game medal" can be obtained. The details will be described after explaining all the processes of this flowchart.

  In step S484, the main control board 60 checks whether the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted. In this process, it is confirmed whether or not an operation switch other than the start switch 34 (for example, any of the bet switch 32, the stop switch 35, and the adjustment switch 36) is being operated. When the operation switches other than the start switch 34 are not operated, it is determined that the start switch operation can be accepted (YES in step S484), and the process proceeds to step S486. When the operation switches other than the start switch 34 are being operated, it is determined that the start switch operation cannot be accepted (NO in step S484), and the process proceeds to step S487.

  Step S486 is a process executed when it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed (YES in step S483) and when it is determined that the start switch operation can be accepted (YES in step S485). In step S486, the main control board 60 sets the start switch acceptance permission flag. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored in the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (permitted)”.

  By performing the process of step S486, when the LED display control is performed at the time of executing the next interrupt process, the game start LED (state display LED 48d) is turned on. That is, the fact that the start switch 34 is valid (that is, the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted) can be notified by the lamp. After step S486 ends, the process of this flowchart ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, step S487 is executed when it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has not elapsed (NO in step S483) or when it is determined that the start switch operation cannot be accepted (NO in step S485). Processing. In neither of these cases is the situation in which the start switch 34 should be enabled, so in step S487, the main control board 60 clears the start switch acceptance permission flag. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored in the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “0 (prohibited)”.

  By performing the process of step S487, when the LED display control is performed during the execution of the next interrupt process, the game start LED (state display LED 48d) is turned off. That is, the fact that the start switch 34 is not effective (the state in which the operation cannot be accepted) can be notified by the lamp. After the step S487 ends, the process of this flowchart ends and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, the main control board 60 executes the start lever check (M_START_CHK), but in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the blocker ON-time monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed (elapsed) in step S483. In this case, if the other operation switch is not being operated (YES in step S485), the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted (step S486), so that the process based on the operation of the start switch 34 can be executed. To do. By such control, it is possible to obtain an effect of preventing "swallowing of game medal" due to operation of the start switch 34. The reason will be described in detail below.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 15, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” measures the waiting time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position). This is a 1-byte timer for "_TM1_BLON_CHK" and the initial value of "_TM1_BLON_CHK" is set to "1" when the D7 bit of input port 2 rising data "_PT_IN2_UP" becomes "1" when the selector passage sensor signal rises. "45" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, the control for changing the blocker 29 from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position) is not permitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 and the passage sensor 28 detects the game medal in the game medal selector 27, the blocker ON monitoring time is set and the predetermined time (45 The blocker 29 cannot be changed to the OFF state (non-permission position) until about 101 ms of interruption has elapsed. Then, the predetermined time of the blocker ON monitoring time is a sufficient time for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, the blocker 29 Is sufficient time to pass through and be detected by the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b). In other words, the time difference between the initial value "45" and the final value "0" of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON, the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 is detected by the insertion sensor 30 (30a, 30b). It is set to be longer than the time required to complete.

  Then, in step S483 of the start lever check (M_START_CHK), the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted regardless of the operation status of other operation switches until the blocker ON monitoring time set as described above elapses. By not executing the process (step S486), the process based on the operation of the start switch 34 is not executed even if the start switch 34 is operated at this timing.

  Here, if the control in step S483 is not performed (that is, the determination based on the blocker ON monitoring time is not performed), the passage sensor 28 detects the game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, if the operation switch other than the start switch 34 (for example, any of the bet switch 32, the stop switch 35, and the adjustment switch 36) is not being operated (YES in step S485), the start is performed. The switch acceptance permission flag is set, and the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted (step S486).

  Under such circumstances, if the start switch 34 is operated while the game medal is passing through the game medal selector 27, it is determined that the start switch 34 has been operated in the main process (M_MAIN) (see FIG. 34). Since the start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL) based on the operation of the start switch 34 is executed (step S40), the insertion process based on the insertion of the game medal (care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK)) is performed. It will not be executed. Blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) is executed when the start switch is received (M_START_CTL) (step S494 in FIG. 53).

  At this time, even if the insertion process is not executed, if the inserted game medals are returned from the payout opening 53 through the “non-permitted game medal passage” formed with the blocker OFF, the player There is no disadvantage to. However, if the control for changing the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permission position) is not in time, the inserted game medals are stored in the hopper 50 without being inserted. In other words, the "swallowing of game medals" occurs due to the operation of the start switch 34, which gives a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the start switch is used until the predetermined time elapses after the blocker ON monitoring time is set (when the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”). The operation of 34 is not valid (the start switch acceptance permission flag is not set), and the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 is prevented from being executed, whereby the game medal inserted immediately before the operation of the start switch 34 On the other hand, the hopper 50 is accommodated in the hopper 50 after the charging process has been performed reliably. That is, in this case, the "swallowing of game medals" due to the operation of the start switch 34 does not occur.

  To summarize the above, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the operation of the start switch 34 when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”). By enabling a predetermined process (start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL)) to be performed, even if the start switch 34 is operated under a situation where a game medal has been inserted, swallowing of the game medal is prevented. You can

  More specifically, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated under the condition that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the start switch 34 is operated. Based on this, it becomes possible to execute a process (obtaining a random number for winning a winning combination, starting reel rotation, etc.). The specific contents of the "processing based on the operation of the start switch 34" are shown in, for example, steps S491, S496, S498 in FIG. 53, steps S41, S42 in FIG.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated and the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the start switch 34 is operated. Based on this, it becomes possible to execute a process (obtaining a random number for winning a winning combination, starting reel rotation, etc.).

  In other words, in other words, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is not the specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”), the start switch 34 Even if the start switch 34 is operated under the situation where a game medal is inserted, by not performing a predetermined process based on an operation (obtaining a random number for winning a winning combination, starting reel rotation, etc.), It is possible to prevent swallowing game medals.

  More specifically, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment operates the start switch 34 when the start switch 34 is operated under the situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is other than “0”. Does not execute the processing based on (such as obtaining a random number for winning a lottery or starting reel rotation).

  Further, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated and the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”, the start switch 34 is operated. Based processing (such as random number acquisition for reel winning and reel rotation start) is not executed.

[4-2-5. Start switch acceptance]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL). "Start switch acceptance" is a subroutine executed in step S40 during the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 53, first, in step S491, the main control board 60 stores the built-in random number in the MPU register (random number soft latch register). The process of step S491 is a latch (acquisition) of a random number, and it is determined in step S41 (role lottery process) of FIG. 34 whether the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to a winning combination.

  In the next step S492, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 34. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is set to "0".

  Next, in step S493, the main control board 60 clears the setting change permission flag. Specifically, the D6 bit (setting unchangeable flag) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “1 (ON)”. This process makes it impossible to change the setting.

  In the next step S494, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). That is, after the start switch 34 is operated, the game medals are controlled not to be accepted even if they are inserted.

  In the next step S495, a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) is executed to read the bet number. The read bet number is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S496, the main control board 60 sets an output request for starting reel rotation. Specifically, for example, "13 (H)" is set as the first control command value and the A register value is set as the second control command. Then, in step S497, the bet number (A register value) read in step S495 is set in the E register (medal number set). Further, in step S498, the main control board 60 stores the control command data set in step S496 in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 by executing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). In other words, the start lever (start switch 34) is operated, and processing for transmitting a command indicating that the game is started to the sub control board 80 is executed.

  Next, in step S499, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the set value stored in the RWM 63 is within the normal range (whether or not the value of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is within the normal range). . When it is determined that the set value is in the normal range of "1" to "6" (YES in step S499), the process proceeds to step S500. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range (NO in step S499), the flow advances to step S505 to execute unrecoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an "E6" error. Details of the non-recoverable error processing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. The read bet number is stored in the A register. In addition, at the time of winning the replay, the number of automatically betted game medals is set as the bet number.

  Next, in step S501, the bet number read in step S500 is doubled. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the added value is stored in the A register. Further, the address “F06F” of the medal insertion signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN” is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S502, the main control board 60 prohibits interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S121 and the like in FIG. 29, and control is performed so that an interrupt does not occur even if an interrupt request signal is input.

  Next, in step S503, the main control board 60 sets the medal insertion signal output count. Specifically, first, a value (medal insertion signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN”) stored in the address indicated by the HL register (in this case, “F06F” stored in step S501) and the A register value (in this case, , And the bet number doubled in step S501), and the added value is stored in the A register. Further, the A register value is stored in the address (“F06F”) indicated by the HL register. By such processing of step S503, the medal shooting signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN” stored in the address “F06F” of the RWM 63 is updated.

  Then, after the processing of step S503, the process proceeds to step S504, the interruption prohibition performed in step S502 is canceled (interruption permitted), and the processing of this flowchart ends.

  In the present embodiment, the interrupt processing is prohibited in steps S502 to S504 as described above, so that the interrupt processing is executed during the update of the medal insertion signal, and the processing of updating the medal insertion signal output count is executed. Can be prevented. That is, after the process of updating the medal shooting signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal shooting signal is updated.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet medal signal is output, a value obtained by doubling the actual bet number is set as the output count (medal insertion signal output count). This control is performed so that when the medal insertion signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeatedly turns on and off, the number of bets on one bet is represented by two times of turning on and off. This is the same when paying out medals. That is, when outputting the medal payout signal to the outside, the medal payout number is calculated twice, and the value is set as the number of times the medal payout signal is output. Two times of ON and OFF represent one medal payout number. To control.

[4-2-6. Payout of medals by winning a prize]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. The "medal payout by winning" is a subroutine executed in step S48 during the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 26, first, in step S511, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of medal payout. This process is a process of storing a control command indicating the number of acquisition (payout) numbers in the register.

  In the next step S512, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET). Specifically, a process of writing (storing) the control command data in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 is performed.

  Next, in step S513, the main control board 60 executes setting of the number of medals. This process is divided into the following two processes. As the first process, the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is stored in the D register. As the second process, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in the E register.

  Next, in step S514, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. Specifically, "1" / "0" of each bit of the operation state flag "_FL_ACTION" stored in the address "F01F" of the RWM 63 is determined.

  Then, in step S515, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the type 1 BB (special role) operation is in progress. Specifically, the operation state flag of the type 1 BB is determined depending on whether or not the D3 bit (type 1 BB) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” is “1 (operation)”. When the operation state flag of the type 1 BB is "1", it is determined that the type 1 BB is operating (YES in step S515), and the process proceeds to step S517 via step S516. On the other hand, when the operation flag of the type 1 BB is "0", it is determined that the type 1 BB is not operating (NO in step S515), and the process proceeds to step S517 without performing step S516.

  In step S516, the main control board 60 performs the process for the type 1 BB operation. In this process, for example, the process of updating the data of the number of acquisitions in the type 1 BB operation (type 1 BB game), the data of the number of acquisitions in the type 1 BB game is acquired, and the number of acquisitions in the type 1 BB game is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value has been exceeded, and when it is determined that the upper limit has been exceeded, processing for clearing information on the number of coins acquired in the type 1 BB game is included.

  In step S517, the main control board 60 performs a setting process of the number of paid-out medals. Specifically, the E register value (the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in step S513) is stored in the A register. As a result, the number of game medals data is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S518, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the replay is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined bit indicating the replay display is “1” in the symbol combination display flag (not shown). When it is determined that the replay is not displayed (NO in step S518), it is the replay winning, and the process proceeds to step S520 via step S519. When it is determined that the replay is being displayed (YES in step S518), that is, when the small winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step S520 without performing step S519.

  In step S519, the main control board 60 sets the number of medals to be paid out. Specifically, the D register value (the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S513) is stored in the A register. As a result, the game medal payout number data is stored in the A register.

  By performing the above steps S517 to S519, the A register value becomes the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" set in step S517 at the time of the replay winning, and when it is not the time of the replay winning (that is, the small winning a prize). Time), the value becomes the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” set in step S519.

  Next, in step S520, the main control board 60 doubles the number of game medals stored in the A register. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the added value is stored in the A register. Further, the address “F070” of the medal payout signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_OUT” is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S521, the main control board 60 prohibits interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S121 in FIG. 29 or step S502 in FIG. 53, and controls so that an interrupt does not occur even if an interrupt request signal is input.

  Next, in step S522, the main control board 60 sets the medal payout signal output count. Specifically, the address indicated by the HL register (in this case, the value stored in "F070" stored in step S520 (medal payout signal output count "_CT_MEDAL_OUT") and the A register value (in this case, step S520 The value of the number of output of the medal payout signal is updated by this processing.

  Then, after the process of step S522, the process proceeds to step S523, the interrupt prohibition performed in step S521 is released (interrupt permission), and the process proceeds to step S524.

  In the present embodiment, as the interrupt processing is prohibited in steps S521 to S523 as described above, the interrupt processing is executed during the update of the medal payout signal, and the processing for updating the medal payout signal output count is executed. Can be prevented. That is, after the process of updating the medal payout signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal payout signal is updated.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set to 10, but the number of medals to be paid out by the next game may be updated during the output of the medal payout signal associated with the payout of 10 medals. Low. However, when the medal payout number is changed in the development process (for example, the maximum payout number is changed from 10 to 15), the payout number may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if the interrupt prohibition process is provided as in the present embodiment, even if the number of paid-out medals is changed (for example, to a maximum of 15) during the development, the change of the program can be reduced.

  Further, it is significant that the process of setting the medal payout signal output count in step S522 is performed before the "payout process (process of step 524 and thereafter in this flowchart)" for actually paying out the game medals. As described above, the medal payout signal output count is created from the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” except when the replay is won. At this time, if the above "payout process" is performed before setting the medal payout signal output count, the game medal payout number data "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" is updated in step S532, so that the correct number of times is output. This is because the medal payout signal may be output.

  Next, in step S524, the main control board 60 determines whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the D register value (the value of the game medal payout number data "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" stored in step S513), and it is determined whether the value after the subtraction is "0". . If the value after subtraction is "0", it is determined that there is no medal payout (NO in step S524), the processing of this flowchart ends, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if the value after subtraction is other than “0”, it is determined that there is a medal payout (YES in step S524), and the process proceeds to step S525.

  In step S525, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the number of stored game medals (stored number).

  Then, in the next step S526, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets read in step S525 has reached the limit number (50 sheets in this embodiment). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored sheet number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” acquired by reading the stored sheet number in step S525 is a value indicating the limit sheet number “50”. If it is determined that the stored number is the limit number (YES in step S526), the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that the stored number is not the limit number (NO in step S526), the process proceeds to step S527.

  In step S527, the main control board 60 sets a waiting time when the accumulated medals are added. Next, in step S528, wait processing is executed until the waiting time set in step S527 elapses. Then, after the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S529.

  In step S529, the main control board 60 executes the addition of one stored sheet (MS_CREDIT_ADD) shown in FIG. 46, and after the end, the process proceeds to step S531.

  Step S530 is a process executed when it is determined in step S526 that the number of stored sheets is the limit number (YES in step S526). In step S530, the main control board 60 executes the one-medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, and upon completion, proceeds to step S531.

  According to the processes of steps S525 to S530, the process of adding the stored number (addition of one stored number) is executed until the stored number reaches the limit number (50), and the stored number is the limit number. At this time, the process of paying out the actual game medal from the hopper 50 (paying one medal) is executed.

  Next, in step S531, the main control board 60 adds "1" to the acquired number display. This process is a process of updating the data displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by "+1". For example, when the display until then is "2", the display is updated to "3". Specifically, the value of the acquired number display data “_NB_PAY_LED” is incremented by “1” (updated).

  In the next step S532, the main control board 60 performs a process of subtracting "1" from the game medal payout number. Specifically, the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is subtracted by “1” (updated).

  Then, in step S533, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game medal payout amount data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” after updating in step S532 has become “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S533), and the process proceeds to step 534. On the other hand, if the value is not “0”, it is determined that the medal payout has not been completed (the medal payout still remains) (NO in step S533), and the process returns to step S525.

  In step S534, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of medal payout. This process is a process of storing a control command indicating the end of the medal payout in the register. Then, in the next step S535, the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) is executed. By this process, the process of writing (storing) the control command data in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 is performed. When step S535 ends, the process of this flowchart ends and the process returns to the main process.

[4-3. Interrupt processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing (I_INTR). As described above, the main control board 60 executes the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 55 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main processing (main loop) of FIG. 34 executed once in one game.

  According to FIG. 55, first, in step S61, the main control board 60 performs a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt inhibiting process as initial processes. The register value saving process in step S61 is to save the current register value to the stack area of the RWM 63 in order to use the register of the main CPU 65 (MPU) used in the main process (main loop) in the interrupt process. Processing. The duplicate interrupt prohibition process is a process of turning on the interrupt prohibition flag so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, there is a case where an execution request for interrupt processing is issued during the execution of power-off processing.

  In the next step S62, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power failure has been detected. Specifically, the main control board 60 is provided with a voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) (not shown), and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device outputs D6 of the input port 0. A power failure detection signal is input to the bit. In step S62, it is determined whether or not this power-off detection signal has been input.

  When it is determined in step S62 that the power failure has not been detected (NO in step S62), the process proceeds to step S63. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power cut has been detected (YES in step S62), the process proceeds to step S78, and the power cut process (IS_POWER_DOWN) is executed. Details of the power-off process are shown in FIG.

  In step S63, the main control board 60 updates the interrupt counter value "_CT_INTR" (not shown) stored in the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S64, the main control board 60 executes timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). The timer measurement is a process of subtracting the time (timer value) set in the main process. Details of the timer measurement are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S65, the main control board 60 performs LED display control (IS_LED_OUT). Although a detailed description is omitted, the LED display control uses the segment LEDs (digits) for setting values, the stored number, the acquired number (payout number), the error display content (error code), etc. according to the situation of the slot machine 10. It is a process of lighting using 1 to 5).

  For example, in the above-described non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP), an error display was output by the main processing (step S198 in FIG. 33), but the setting value during setting change and setting confirmation, the stored number, the acquired number (payout number) , And the display of recoverable errors are performed by the LED display control in step S65 for each interrupt processing.

  Next, in step S66, the main control board 60 performs a process of reading the input ports 0-2. In this processing, whether or not the bet switch 33, the start switch 34, the stop switch 35, and the like are operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, level data based on the input ports 0 to 2) is read. Rising data, falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 63.

  In the next step S67, the main control board 60 performs a built-in random number check process. In the present embodiment, a flag (not shown) that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the winning combination lottery (such as when the random number is updated slowly) is detected, the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHZ) input to the MPU are provided and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, when "RCK <SCLK / 2" is satisfied, the error flag is turned on.

  Then, in step S68, the main control board 60 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the built-in random number checked in step S67 (whether or not the error flag is on). When it is determined that no error has occurred (NO in step S68), the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, if it is determined that an error has occurred (YES in step S68), the flow advances to step S79 to execute non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an "E7" error. Details of the non-recoverable error processing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In step S69, the main control board 60 controls the drive of the reel 39. This control is performed for each reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c), and depending on the operating status, it includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby. To be When the drive control of the reel 39 is completed, the process proceeds to step S70.

  In step S70, the main control board 60 performs a port output process. In the port output processing, specifically, for example, the excitation output of the motor 40 and the hopper motor 51 and the excitation output of the blocker 29 are performed.

  In the next step S71, the main control board 60 executes a selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK) for checking an input error (CH error) regarding the game medal selector 27. Details of the selector passage sensor check are shown in FIG. Although not shown in this example, the slot machine 10 may also perform an error check on various sensors other than the selector passage sensor check.

  In the next step S72, the main control board 60 executes control command transmission (IS_CMD_SET). In the control command transmission process, for example, the control command set by the output request set and the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) (that is, the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 63) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is the process of transmitting.

  More specifically, when a control command in the output request set and control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is set in the command buffer of the RWM63, interrupt processing after that time point (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, at that time point) In the next interrupt processing), the control command is transmitted in step S72, so that the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  Next, in step S73, the main control board 60 stores the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 63 in the register (external signal storage). Then, in the next step S74, the main control board 60 transmits an external signal to the external terminal board 100 by executing a process of writing (setting) the data stored in the register to the output port 6 (external). Signal output).

  Next, in step S75, the main control board 60 performs an output process of a test signal (conditional device information). In this process, based on the data stored in the RWM 63, the process of writing (setting) the data to a predetermined output port (not mounted in the game machine installed in the market) is executed, and the slot This is a process of transmitting a test signal to a tester when determining whether the machine 10 is properly designed according to the law.

  As the information name transmitted to the testing machine, the information about the operating state is called the test signal and the information about the winning combination is called the condition device information. The information about the operating state is the first test signal, the information about the winning combination. May be referred to as the second test signal. Further, information other than the above may be transmitted to the tester. For example, it is possible to transmit information (referred to as a third test signal) regarding an optimum stop operation mode (stop operation position, stop operation order). As a result, it is possible to perform a pay-out test (also called a simulation test) on the testing machine side.

  As described above, the output port for outputting the test signal is not mounted on the game machine installed in the market, but the ROM 64 of the main control means 60 has a program for outputting the test signal. Remembered The test signal is not output to the game machines installed in the market, but the process for outputting the test signal is executed by the main control board 60.

  Next, in step S76, the main control board 60 performs a random number update process. Then, in the next step S77, the main control board 60 restores the register value saved in step S61 and cancels the prohibition of the duplicate interrupt (permits the next interrupt). Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt process is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt process can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the accumulated number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, the state display LED 48 (48a to 48g), and the set value display LED 66 are turned on / off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Controlled.

  Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command for the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer of the RWM 63, the control command transmission process is performed for each interrupt process.

  Note that, as shown in step S191 of FIG. 33, interrupt processing is not permitted when the non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) is executed. This is because the non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur. Therefore, processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 63 based on data from the input port 61, sub-control board 80 The interrupt itself is prohibited in order to prevent the execution of (control command transmission) and the like.

  In other words, when the non-recoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a control command buffer stores an untransmitted control command when the non-recoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. This is because the control command itself stored in the control command buffer may be incorrect when a non-recoverable error occurs.

[4-3-1. Timer measurement]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). The timer measurement is a subroutine performed during execution of the interrupt process (I_INTR), and is a process of subtracting the time (timer value) set in the main process.

  The flowchart shown in FIG. 56 shows an example of the processing procedure of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) for the arrangement example of the timer shown in FIG.

  In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 15, a plurality of 1-byte timers and a plurality of 2-byte timers are arranged so that each is stored in a continuous storage area (RWM63), and The 1-byte timer group (also referred to as 1-byte timer area and 1-byte timer storage area) and the 2-byte timer group (also referred to as 2-byte timer area and 2-byte timer storage area) are stored in a continuous storage area. (The whole is also called a "timer group"). Specifically, seven 1-byte timers are arranged at addresses "F021" to "F027", and three 2-byte timers are arranged at addresses "F028" to "F02D".

  However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of a plurality of timers in the RWM 63 is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. 15 as long as it has the above-mentioned arrangement feature, and timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT The processing procedure of () is not limited to the processing procedure of FIG. Specific modified examples will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  According to FIG. 56, first, in step S601, the main control board 60 sets the measurement start timer address. In FIG. 56, measurement of the start address “F021 (H)” of the 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT (external signal output time)” arranged at the highest position of the 1-byte timer group in the storage area of the timer group in the RWM 63 is started. The case of using the timer address will be described. In this case, in step S601, the address "F021 (H)" is set in the HL register.

  In the next step S602, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S603, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is decremented by "1". For example, when the HL register value is “F021 (H)”, the value (“_TM1_OUT_CNT”) stored in the address “F021” of the RWM 63 is subtracted by “1”. When a carry is generated as a result of subtraction of "1", "0" is stored in the address (at this time, a correction process such as a process of adding a carry flag or a process of adding "1"). Not required). The carry-down can occur when the original timer value is "0" and "1" is subtracted.

  The process in step S603 will be described in detail using specific values. For example, when the process of step S603 is performed for the first time (first cycle of the repeating process of steps S603 to S605), the HL register value becomes “F021 (H)” due to the setting of the measurement start timer address in step S601. ing. Therefore, in the process of step S603, "1" is subtracted from the data (that is, the timer value of "_TM1_OUT_CNT (external signal output time)") stored in 1 byte of the address "F021 (H)". Further, for example, when the process of step S603 is performed for the second time (the second round of the repeating process of steps S603 to S605), the HL register value is set by the process of step S604 of the first round (details will be described later). "1" is added to become "F022 (H)". Therefore, in the process of step S603, "1" is subtracted from the data stored in the 1 byte of the address "F022 (H)" (that is, the timer value of "_TM1_STOP (turning cylinder stop acceptance standby time)").

  As a first example of the concrete value, assume that the data stored in the address “F022 (H)” is “07 (H)” (when the operation acceptance to one stop button is confirmed, (This corresponds to the situation where the initial value "7" of the stop acceptance waiting time is set), and in step S603, a process of subtracting "1" from this "07 (H)" is performed, and the 1-byte data after the subtraction is "06". (H) ”.

  As a second example of the specific value, if the data stored in the address “F022 (H)” is “00 (H)” (the cylinder stop acceptance standby time elapses and the next stop button is pressed). (This corresponds to the situation until the operation to the next stop button is accepted), and in step S603, the process of subtracting “1” from “00 (H)” is performed. Be seen. At this time, if "1" is subtracted, a carry flag is raised in operation and a carry-down occurs. However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores “00 (H)” in the target address of the RWM 63 when a carry-down occurs. That is, when the process of step S603 (update of the timer value) is performed while the 1-byte data “00 (H)” is stored, “00” is stored in the address “F022 (H)” after the subtraction. (H) ”is stored. As a result, regarding 1-byte data as a timer value, when the timer value is “0”, the updated timer value is also “0”.

  Next, in step S604, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is incremented by "1". The value after addition is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address designated by the HL register becomes the address of the next lower 1-byte timer (except when the current designated destination is the last 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK").

  The process of step S604 is executed even when there is no next 1-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK" and the next timer is the 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK"). . At this time, specifically, the address designated by the HL register is changed from “F027 (H)” to “F028 (H)” by the calculation in step S604, and the address designated by the HL register after the calculation is “F028 (H)”. Is the lower digit address (upper address) of the first 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK" adjacent to the last 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK".

  In step S605, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is still a 1-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not ended. (NO in step S605), and the process returns to step S603. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 1-byte timer value in step S603 has been repeated for the number of 1-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S607, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, from the 2-byte data, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the "HL + 1" register is the upper digit. Subtract "1". In addition, when a carry-down of 2-byte data occurs as a result of subtracting “1”, “0” is stored in the address (at this time, a process of adding a carry flag or a process of adding “1”). It does not require correction processing such as). The carry-down can occur when the original timer value is "0" and "1" is subtracted (see the third example of the specific value described later).

  The process in step S607 will be described in detail using specific values. For example, when the processing of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” that is finally updated by the timer measurement of the above-described 1-byte timer is completed, the HL register value is “F028 (H)” by the processing of step S604. At this time, the address stored in the “HL + 1” register is “F029 (H)”. Therefore, in the processing of step S607, "1" is subtracted from the data stored in the 2 bytes consisting of the lower digit address "F028 (H)" and the upper digit address "F029 (H)".

  Here, as a first example of the concrete value, the data stored at the address “F028 (H)” is “05 (H)” and the data stored at the address “F029 (H)” is “01 (H). ) ”, It is considered that“ 0105 (H) ”is stored as 2-byte data, and a process of subtracting“ 1 ”from this“ 0105 (H) ”is performed. That is, the 2-byte data after the subtraction becomes “0104 (H)”. Therefore, in the 2-byte data after the subtraction, “04 (H)” is stored in the lower digit address “F028 (H)” and “01 (H)” is stored in the upper digit address “F029 (H)”. .

  As a second example of the concrete value, 2-byte data “0100 (H)” is stored (that is, “00 (H)” is stored in the address “F028 (H)” and the address “F029 (H)” is stored. ) ”Is stored as“ 01 (H) ”), the 2-byte data is subtracted by“ 1 ”to be“ 00FF (H) ”. Therefore, the lower digit address“ F028 (H) ”is set to“ FF ”. (H) "is stored, and" 00 (H) "is stored in the higher digit address" F029 (H) ".

  As a third example of the specific value, "0000 (H)" is stored as 2-byte data (that is, "00 (H)" is stored in the address "F028 (H)" and the address "F029 ( In the case of "00 (H)" stored in "H)", subtracting "1" from the 2-byte data causes a carry flag to be raised in operation and a carry-down occurs. However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores “00 (H)” in the target address of the RWM 63 when a carry-down occurs. That is, when the processing of step S607 (update of the timer value) is performed while the 2-byte data “0000 (H)” is stored, the lower digit address “F028 (H)” after the subtraction is “00 (H)” is stored, and “00 (H)” is stored in the upper digit address “F029 (H)”. As a result, regarding the 2-byte data as a timer value, when the timer value is "0", the updated timer value is also "0".

  In step S608, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is added by "1", and further the HL register value is added by "1". The value after addition is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is added by "2", so the next lower 2-byte timer (except when the current specified destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_GAME"). It becomes the lower digit address (upper address) of. The process of step S608 is executed even when there is no next 2-byte timer (when the currently designated destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_GAME").

  The process of step S608 is executed even when there is no next 2-byte timer (when the currently designated destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_GAME"). At this time, specifically, the address designated by the HL register is changed from “F02C (H)” to “F02E (H)” by the calculation in step S608, and the address designated by the HL register after the calculation is “F02E (H)”. Is an address outside the timer storage area, but is not used in the subsequent processing.

  In step S609, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is a 2-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not ended. (NO in step S609), and the process returns to step S607. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 2-byte timer value in step S607 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S609), and the processing of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, after the measurement start timer address “F021 (H)” is set in the HL register in step S601, a plurality of 1-byte timers are set in steps S602 to S605. Timer values (“timer value” may be referred to as “count value”, “interrupt count”, etc.) are sequentially updated (measurement of 1-byte timer), and timers of a plurality of 2-byte timers are obtained in steps S606 to S609. By sequentially updating the values (measurement by the 2-byte timer), each timer value of the plurality of 1-byte timers and the plurality of 2-byte timers continuously arranged (stored) in the RWM 63 is updated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by disposing a plurality of timers at consecutive addresses, as shown in step S604 and step S608, it is only necessary to change the HL register value by a predetermined value, and the next timer The storage destination (address) of can be specified.

  Specifically, in order to specify the storage destination of the next timer, one process of incrementing the HL register value by “+1” may be repeated for the number of 1-byte timers during the measurement of the 1-byte timer. In the middle, one process of "+2" the HL register value may be repeated by the number of 2-byte timers (repeating addition instruction). That is, in the present embodiment, the instruction for directly writing the address of the RWM 63 in the HL register is required only once when the measurement start timer address is set (step S601), and after that, such "addition / subtraction instruction By repeating “(in the case of FIG. 56, only the subtraction instruction is used, but in a modified example described later, it may be an addition instruction), it is possible to specify the storage destinations of a plurality of timers. Therefore, the storage destination of each timer is referred to (a reference instruction) as is done by a program in a conventional gaming machine, and the storage destination of the next timer is designated in the HL register based on the reference result (designated instruction). Such processing becomes unnecessary. Then, as compared with the conventional program that executes the reference instruction and the designated instruction for each timer, the program of the present embodiment that repeatedly executes the same addition instruction by the 1-byte timer or the 2-byte timer has a larger program capacity. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  That is, according to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) of the present embodiment, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the timer measurement process in the conventional gaming machine. It should be noted that such a reduction effect of the program capacity tends to increase as the number of continuously arranged timers increases, and is particularly effective in a gaming machine that uses a large number of timers while the upper limit of the program capacity is defined. Can be said.

  Further, in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, regardless of the value of the timer value before the update in step S603 or step S607 (that is, regardless of the value of the timer value before the subtraction, ), A process of updating (subtracting) the timer value of the target timer is performed (hereinafter, this process is also called “special subtraction process” (note that the process of step S603 is the 1-byte special subtraction process, and the process of step S607 is Sometimes called separately as a 2-byte special subtraction process)).

  In the special subtraction process, when the timer value before subtraction is “N (N ≧ 1)”, the timer value after subtraction is set as the timer value after subtraction, as described in the specific processing procedure example in step S603 or step S607. While "N-1" is stored in the storage destination of the timer value (timer storage area of the RWM63), when the timer value before subtraction is "0", the storage destination of the timer value as the timer value after subtraction “0” is stored in (timer storage area of RWM63).

  As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when updating (subtracting) each timer value by timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT), the timer value is “0” as seen in the conventional gaming machine. Instead of performing individual subtraction processing after determining whether or not there is any, the timer value is uniformly subtracted by the special subtraction processing described above. By performing such a special subtraction process, a process associated with the determination of the timer value before the subtraction (for example, a process of determining whether or not the timer value is “0” and not subtracting if it is “0”) ) Is unnecessary, an increase in program capacity can be suppressed, and it can be expected to reduce the program capacity as compared with the timer measurement processing in the conventional gaming machine.

  Further, as described in detail as the third example of the specific value, in the special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, when a carry-down occurs when the calculation for subtracting the timer value is performed (specifically, for example, “ Since the carry flag becomes the operation result of "1" in "FF (H)" and "00 (H)" is stored in the target address of the RWM 63, the above "FF (H)" is newly stored. There is no need for instruction processing such as storing a value obtained by adding "1" at the target address and instruction processing such as adding a carry flag "1". Therefore, according to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress an increase in the program capacity, and it can be expected to reduce the program capacity as compared with the timer measurement processing in the conventional gaming machine.

  Here, the effect of reducing the program capacity by the special subtraction processing of the present embodiment will be supplemented.

  First, regarding the subtraction process of 1-byte data, in the conventional subtraction process of 1-byte data, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting "1 (H)" from "00 (H)" is generally "FF (H)". Target (1 byte normal subtraction process). Therefore, if the subtraction result of "1 (H)" is changed from "00 (H)" to "00 (H)" by the 1-byte normal subtraction process, "1 (H)" is added to "FF (H)" again. It is necessary to execute another instruction such as adding "." (If processing of the carry flag is necessary, an instruction for that processing is also required).

  On the other hand, in the 1-byte special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting “1 (H)” from “00 (H)” becomes “00 (H)” by one instruction. It can be expected to reduce the program capacity.

  Similarly, in the subtraction process of 2-byte data, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting "1 (H)" from "0000 (H)" becomes "FFFF (H)" in the conventional subtraction process of 2-byte data. Is general (2-byte normal subtraction processing), and in order to set the subtraction result to "0000 (H)", another instruction such as "1 (H)" is added to "FFFF (H)". The need arises.

  On the other hand, in the 2-byte special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting "1 (H)" from "0000 (H)" becomes "0000 (H)" by one instruction. It can be expected to reduce the program capacity.

  In other words, in summary, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special subtraction process when the timer value is “N (N ≧ 1)”, and the result of the special subtraction process is “N−1. (The timer value can be updated to "N-1"), and when the special subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", the result of the special subtraction process becomes "0" (the timer value is " It will remain at "0").

  As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) that updates a plurality of timer values, when the timer value is “0” and when the timer value is other than “0”, Since the subtraction process (or the addition process may be performed) can be performed with the same single instruction (1 step), an increase in the program capacity can be suppressed.

[4-3-2. Selector passage sensor check]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK). The selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK) is a process for checking an input error (CH error) regarding the game medal selector 27.

  According to FIG. 57, first, in step S611, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the selector passage sensor signal has risen (whether or not the passage sensor 28 has detected a game medal). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (selector passage sensor signal) of the input port 2 rising data "_PT_IN2_UP" stored in the address "F00D" of the RWM 63 is "1 (ON)". Data such as the input port 2 rising data “_PT_IN2_UP” (data related to the input signals of the input ports 0 to 2) is generated at the time of executing the interrupt process (I_INTR) and stored in the RWM 63 (step S66 in FIG. 55). .

  When it is determined in step S611 that the selector passage sensor signal has risen (YES in step S611), the process proceeds to step S612, and when it is determined that there is no rise in the selector passage sensor signal (NO in step S611), step S615. Proceed to.

  In step S612, the main control board 60 adds "1" to the value of the closing monitoring counter "_CT_SEN_CHK". As described above, the insertion monitoring counter "_CT_SEN_CHK" is a counter for monitoring passage abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 of the game medal selector 27, and the value is initialized when the blocker ON (M_BLOCLER_ON) is executed (Fig. In step S264 of 39), when it is determined in the care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) that the game medal has passed normally, the value is subtracted by "1" (step S350 in FIG. 45). Then, as described in the care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK), it is determined whether or not there is a passage abnormality based on the value of the insertion monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK” that changes according to the situation as described above (step S351 in FIG. 45). ).

  Next, in step S613, the main control board 60 sets the selector passage residence time. Specifically, the address “F025” of “_TM1_CH_CHK” is stored in the HL register, and “200 (D)” is stored in the address “F025” indicated by the HL register. This is a process of setting the initial value "200" to the timer value of the selector passage residence time "_TM1_CH_CHK" stored in the address "F025" of the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S614, the main control board 60 sets a blocker OFF monitoring time and a blocker ON monitoring time. Specifically, "144 (D)" is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value (that is, "F026"), and the value obtained by further adding "1" to the HL register value is "45 (D)" is stored in the indicated address (that is, "F027"). These set the initial value of "144" to the timer value of the blocker OFF monitoring time "_TM1_BLOFF_CHK" stored in the address "F026" of the RWM63, and set the blocker ON monitoring time "_TM1_BLON_CHK" stored in the address "F027". Is a process of setting an initial value "45" to the timer value of ".

  As in the above-described specific processing, in the present embodiment, when the timer value is stored in the plurality of addresses of the RWM 63 based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal, the plurality of addresses are consecutive, so that the HL register The address to set each timer value can be designated by simply adding "1" to. Therefore, the processing capacity (program capacity for main control) can be reduced as compared with the case where the address for storing each timer value is stored in the HL register every time and the timer value is set.

  In the next step S615, the main control board 60 determines whether the selector passage sensor signal is ON (whether the passage sensor 28 detects a game medal). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (selector passage sensor signal) of the input port 2 level data "_PT_IN2_OLD" stored at the address "F00C" of the RWM 63 is "1 (ON)".

  When it is determined in step S615 that the selector passage sensor signal is ON (YES in step S615), the process proceeds to step S616. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector passage sensor signal is not ON (NO in step S615), the passage sensor 28 does not detect the game medal, so that the CH error does not occur and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S616, the main control board 60 determines whether the selector passage residence time has elapsed. Specifically, the data stored in “_TM1_CH_CHK” is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the data stored in the A register is “0”. If the A register value is "0", it is determined that the selector passage residence time has elapsed (YES in step S616), and the process proceeds to step S617. On the other hand, if the A register value is other than "0" in step S616, it is determined that the selector passage residence time has not elapsed (NO in step S616), and the process of this flowchart ends. In this case, even if the passage sensor 28 detects a game medal (the selector passage sensor signal is ON), it is not determined that a CH error has occurred because the selector passage residence time has not elapsed.

  Step S617 is a process executed when the passage sensor 28 detects a game medal (the selector passage sensor signal is ON) and the selector passage residence time has elapsed. In such a situation, it is determined that a game medal has a retention error (CH error) in the game medal passage (selector passage) of the game medal selector 27.

  Therefore, in step S617, the main control board 60 sets data for informing the CH error detection (CH error detection informing data set). Specifically, the D4 bit (CH error) of the sub notification flag 2 “_FL_SUB_INF2” stored in the address “F013” of the RWM 63 is set to “1”. After the processing of step S617, the processing of this flowchart ends.

  The above is the detailed processing procedure of the selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK).

  In the step S611, it is described that the determination as to whether or not there is a rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal is made based on the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising edge data “_PT_IN2_UP” stored in the RWM 63. The determination criterion of the rise of the selector passage sensor signal in 10 is not limited to this, and it is determined based on the input signal from the input port 2 or the D7 bit of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” stored in the RWM 63. You may do so.

  Specifically, for example, the main control board 60 directly checks at least the data of the input port 2, and when the D7 bit of the input port 2 is input, a predetermined timer value is set (this flowchart). In other words, the selector passage residence time “_TM1_CH_CHK” in step S613 may be set to the initial timer value “200”). In the case where such a method is adopted, strictly speaking, the rise of the input signal is not judged, but when there is an input from the passage sensor 28 (detection by the sensor), the timer value The specification is to set. Further, the data of the D7 bit (selector passage sensor signal) of the input port 2 level data "_PT_IN2_OLD" is confirmed, and when the data is "1 (ON)", a predetermined timer value is set ( In the present flowchart, the initial timer value "200" may be set in "_TM1_CH_CHK" in the selector passage residence time setting in step S613.

[4-3-3. Power-off process]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN). The power-off process shown in FIG. 58 is a process performed when it is determined that the power-off is detected in the interrupt process (I_INTR) (see step S78 in FIG. 55).

  According to FIG. 58, first, in step S621, the main control board 60 turns off the outputs of all the output ports 62 (for example, the output ports 0 to 6).

  Then, in step S622, a power-off processing completed flag (not shown) is stored in the RWM 63. The process of step S622 is a process of storing, in the RWM 63, data indicating that the power-off process by the interrupt process is being executed (power-off process completed flag). The power-off processing completed flag set in step S622 is cleared in the final processing of the power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) (see step S151 in FIG. 31).

  Next, in step S623, the main control board 60 sets the control command read pointer to an even number (first time). As described above, when transmitting the control command, the first control command and the second control command (two control commands) are transmitted. Further, as will be described later, the process of transmitting the first control command and the process of transmitting the second control command by one interruption process are executed twice. However, after the first control command is transmitted, the power may be cut off before the second control command is transmitted. In this case, the control command is transmitted again from the first control.

  Therefore, in such a case, the process of step S623 sets the read pointer designating the address of the buffer in which the control command is stored to an even number. For example, when the read pointer is "00011111 (B)", it is set to "00011110 (B)". When the number is an even number from the beginning like “00011110 (B)”, it is left as it is. By this processing, the buffer of the designated address is always an even number, and the buffer stores the first control command. This makes it possible to reliably transmit the control command twice by simple program processing.

  In the next step S624, the main control board 60 calculates the checksum data of the RWM 63. This processing is to calculate a checksum including a work area (RWM63) used by the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.

  Then, in the next step S625, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum is completed, and if it is determined that the calculation is not completed (NO in step S625), the process proceeds to step S624. Return to continue the checksum calculation. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed (YES in step S625), the process proceeds to step S626.

  In step S626, the main control board 60 stores the checksum of the RWM 63 calculated in step S624 in the RWM 63. Here, the data stored in the RWM 63 is processed into a value (also referred to as complement data) that becomes data indicating “0” when the checksum of the RWM 63 is performed again. Accordingly, when the checksum of the RWM 61 is executed at the start of the program (see step S14 in FIG. 27), whether the value of the RWM 63 is correct is determined by whether the checksum calculation result is “0”. Since only the judgment is required, the program processing can be simplified and the processing time can be shortened.

  Then, in the next step S627, a reset waiting state is set. In the main control board 60, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cutoff detection circuit), and thus the state of waiting for the output of the reset signal is entered. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device receives a power failure detection signal in the D6 bit of the input port 0, and then resets after a predetermined time elapses by a circuit including a capacitor and a resistor. The signal is configured to be input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitors and the resistance values are designed such that the processing at the time of power-off is executed normally.

[4-3-4. Modification]
Up to now, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed by the main control board 60 of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the subroutine thereof have been described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. However, the processing procedure of information processing in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the processing procedure of each flowchart illustrated so far.

  Hereinafter, with respect to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) described in detail in [4-3-1], a modified example according to a processing procedure different from that in FIG. 56 will be described. More specifically, a modification (first and second) of the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) when setting an address different from that of FIG. 56 as the measurement start timer address will be described. 60 and 61.

  In FIG. 56, in step S601, the highest address “F021 (H)” of the 1-byte timer storage area in the timer storage area is set in the HL register as the measurement start timer address. The machine 10 is not limited to this, and can start timer measurement from the 2-byte timer storage area side, for example. A processing procedure for performing such timer measurement will be described with reference to a first modification (FIG. 60) and a second modification (FIG. 61).

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the timer storage area. The timer storage area shown in FIG. 59 is a part of the storage area of the RWM 63 and corresponds to the arrangement of the timers shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, the address "F021 (H)" - "F027 (H)" is equivalent to one byte timer storage area in which a plurality of 1-byte timer is stored, the address "F02A (H)" - " “F02D (H)” corresponds to a 2-byte timer storage area in which a plurality of 2-byte timers are stored.

  Then, (X) shown in FIG. 59 indicates the measurement start timer address “F021 (H)” in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) of FIG. Similarly, (Y) indicates the measurement start timer address “F02C (H)” in the first modified example (FIG. 60) described later, and (Z) in the second modified example (FIG. 61) described later. It indicates the measurement start timer address “F02E (H)”.

[4-3-4-1. First Modification]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a first modified example of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). As described above, in the first modification, the measurement start timer address set when starting the timer measurement is “F02E (H)”.

  According to FIG. 60, first, in step S801, the main control board 60 sets the measurement start timer address. Specifically, the address “F02E (H)” is set in the HL register. Note that "F02E (H)" is not the address of the timer storage area, but the lower digit address (upper address) "F02C (of the 2-byte timer" _TM2_GAME (minimum game time) "placed at the lowermost of the 2-byte timer group. H) ”is“ +2 ”.

  Then, in steps S802 to S805, "measurement of 2-byte timer" is performed, and in steps S806 to S809, "measurement of 1-byte timer" is performed.

  In step S802, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S803, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by "1", and the HL register value is further subtracted by "1". The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register has been decremented by "2", and in the case of the first loop, the lower digit address ("_TM2_GAME (minimum game time)" of the first 2-byte timer stored in the lowest order ( Upper address). In the second and subsequent loops, it becomes the lower digit address (upper address) of the next higher 2-byte timer.

  Note that the process of step S803 is not executed when there is no next 2-byte timer (when the currently designated destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK" and the next timer is the 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK"). . However, the presence / absence of the next 2-byte timer is not determined in step S803. In such a case, it is determined as "YES" in step S805 described later, the process proceeds to step S806, and the process of step S803 is performed. Because there is no.

  In step S804, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, from the 2-byte data, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the "HL + 1" register is the upper digit. Subtract "1". The processing in step S804 is the same as the processing in step S607 in FIG. 56, and the processing in each example of the concrete value and the processing when a carry-down occurs are also applied. That is, in step S804, the "special subtraction process" described in FIG. 56 is performed on the 2-byte timer value.

  In step S805, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is a 2-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not ended. (NO in step S805), the process returns to step S803. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 2-byte timer value in step S804 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S805), and the process proceeds to step S806.

  In step S806, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S807, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by "1". The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register becomes the address of the next 1-byte timer on the upper side.

  The process of step S807 is not executed when there is no next 1-byte timer (when the currently designated destination is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”). However, the presence / absence of the next 1-byte timer is not determined in step S807, and in such a case, it is determined as "YES" in step S809 to be described later and the processing of this flowchart ends.

  In step S808, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is decremented by "1". The process of step S808 is the same as the process of step S603 of FIG. 56, and the process when a carry-down occurs is also applied. That is, in step S808, the "special subtraction process" described in FIG. 56 is performed on the 1-byte timer value.

  In step S809, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is still a 1-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not ended. (NO in step S809), and the process returns to step S807. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 1-byte timer value in step S808 has been repeated for the number of 1-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S809), and the processing of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the first modified example shown in FIG. 60, similar to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, the process of changing the HL register value by a predetermined value is performed, so that the next timer is stored. The destination (address) can be designated, and "special subtraction processing" is performed in updating the timer value. Therefore, the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) according to the first modification can also obtain the effect according to the present embodiment described in [4-3-1].

[4-3-4-2. Second Modification]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a second modification of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). As described above, in the second modification, the measurement start timer address set when starting the timer measurement is set to “F02C (H)”.

  According to FIG. 61, first, in step S811, the main control board 60 sets the measurement start timer address. Specifically, the address “F02C (H)” is set in the HL register. Note that "F02C (H)" is the lower digit address (upper address) of the 2-byte timer "_TM2_GAME (minimum game time)" arranged at the lowest of the 2-byte timer group.

  Then, in steps S812 to S815, "measurement of 2-byte timer" is performed, and in steps S817 to S820, "measurement of 1-byte timer" is performed. In step S816 between the measurement of the 2-byte timer and the measurement of the 1-byte timer, a process of correcting the designated address stored in the HL register is performed.

  In step S812, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S813, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, from the 2-byte data, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the "HL + 1" register is the upper digit. Subtract "1". The process of step S813 is the same as the process of step S607 of FIG. 56, and the process in each example of the concrete value and the process when a carry-down occur are also applied. That is, in step S813, the "special subtraction process" described in FIG. 56 is performed on the 2-byte timer value.

  In step S814, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by "1", and the HL register value is further subtracted by "1". I do. The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register will be the one decremented by "2", so the next 2-byte timer on the upper side (except when the currently specified destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK") It becomes the lower digit address (upper address) of.

  The process of step S814 is executed even when there is no next 2-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK" and the next timer is the 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK"). . At this time, specifically, the address designated by the HL register is changed from “F028 (H)” to “F026 (H)” by the calculation in step S814. The address "F026 (H)" specified by the HL register after this operation is not the address of the first 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK" adjacent to the last 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK", but the adjacent 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLOFF_CHK". It becomes the address of. In step S816, which will be described later, processing for correcting such a deviation of the designated address is performed.

  In step S815, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is a 2-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not ended. (NO in step S815), and the process returns to step S813. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 2-byte timer value in step S813 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S815), and the process proceeds to step S816.

  In step S816, the designated address stored in the HL register is corrected. Specifically, the HL register value is incremented by "1" and stored in the HL register. As described in step S814, the HL register value at the time of advancing to step S816 is "F026 (H)", and this designated address is the 1-byte timer "which should be designated originally as the" next timer address "". It is smaller than the address "F027 (H)" of "_TM1_BLON_CHK" by "1". Therefore, in step S816, the HL register value is incremented by "1" to correct (eliminate) the deviation of the designated address, and the address "F027 (H)" of the first 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK" is designated. Therefore, the measurement of the 1-byte timer can be started from step S817 thereafter.

  In step S817, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S818, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is decremented by "1". The process of step S818 is the same as the process of step S603 of FIG. 56, and the process when a carry-down occurs is also applied. That is, in step S818, the "special subtraction process" described in FIG. 56 is performed on the 1-byte timer value.

  In step S819, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by "1". The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register becomes the address of the next 1-byte timer on the upper side (except when the currently specified destination is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”).

  The process of step S819 is executed even when there is no next 1-byte timer (when the currently designated destination is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”). At this time, specifically, the address designated by the HL register is changed from “F021 (H)” to “F020 (H)” by the calculation in step S819, and the address designated by the HL register after the calculation is “F020 (H)”. Is an address outside the timer storage area, but is not used in the subsequent processing.

  In step S820, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is other than "0", it means that there is still a 1-byte timer for which the timer value has not been updated, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not ended. (NO of step S820), and returns to step S818. On the other hand, if the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 1-byte timer value in step S818 has been repeated by the number of 1-byte timers. Is determined to have ended (YES in step S820), and the processing of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the second modified example shown in FIG. 61, similar to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, the processing for changing the HL register value by a predetermined value is performed, so that the next timer is stored. The destination (address) can be designated, and "special subtraction processing" is performed in updating the timer value. Therefore, similar to the first modification, the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) according to the second modification can also obtain the effect according to the present embodiment described in [4-3-1].

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the case where the 1-byte timer group is arranged on the upper address side of the RWM 63 and the 2-byte timer group is arranged on the lower address side has been described as an example. The arrangement relationship of the byte timer groups may be reversed (that is, the 1-byte timer group may be arranged on the lower address side and the 2-byte timer group may be arranged on the upper address side). Even in such a case, the effects of this embodiment can be obtained by appropriately applying the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIGS. 56, 60, and 61. Further, the storage area of each timer value is not limited to the combination of 1 byte and 2 bytes, and is configured with a single data size (for example, all 2-byte timers), and timers with other data sizes are included. You may In other words, even if the number of 1-byte timers is “N (N ≧ 0)” and the number of 2-byte timers is “M (M ≧ 1)”, the number of 1-byte timers is “N (N ≧ 1)”. The number of 2-byte timers may be “M (M ≧ 0)”. Further, even if the number of 1-byte timers is 1, it may be referred to as a 1-byte timer storage area, and even if the number of 2-byte timers is 1, it is referred to as a 2-byte timer storage area. Good.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is not necessary for all the timer values to be stored in a continuous address space as a storage area for storing the timer value, and at least a part of the storage area for storing the timer value is continuous. It is only necessary that it be located at the specified address.

  Moreover, the specific timer values shown in the above description are merely examples, and the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the timer values shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Values can be used. Specifically, for example, each address of the timer storage area for storing the timer value can be arbitrarily set. Further, for example, the label of the value (timer value) stored in the timer storage area for storing the timer value, the purpose (content), and the data (initial value etc.) can be arbitrarily determined. Further, for example, the data size of the timer storage area for storing the timer value of 1 is not limited to 1 byte (1 byte timer storage area) or 2 bytes (2 byte timer storage area), and 3 bytes (3 byte timer storage area). Area) or more.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the description of the timer shown in FIG. 15, the timer value of each timer stored in the RWM 63 is decremented by “1” every time one interrupt process is performed (every one interrupt). However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the updating of the timer value is not limited to each interrupt. For example, the timer value may be updated every two interrupts or every four interrupts. Further, the interrupt cycle is not limited to 2.235 ms. In other words, it is sufficient that the timer value can be updated at a predetermined cycle.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the description of the timer, the subtraction timer that subtracts the timer value for each interrupt process has been described as an example, but the information processing according to the present embodiment is an addition timer that adds the timer value for each interrupt process. Can also be applied. However, when applied to the addition timer, the result of addition operation of 1-byte data (or 2-byte data) is a digit when updating the timer value in timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) (for example, steps S603 and S607 in FIG. 56). When the overflow occurs, it is necessary to perform "special addition processing" for storing "0" in the target address.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 10 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. Gaming machines other than slot machines, for example, pachinko machines, gaming machines that combine pachinko machines and slot machines, management gaming machines that do not require game medals (medalless gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines), casinos. The present invention can be applied to a machine or the like.

1 Base 2 Front Door 10 Slot Machine 11 Power Switch 12 Setting Key Switch 13 Setting Change / Reset Switch 14 Setting Door Switch 15 Door Switch 16 Board Case 17 Display Window 19 Performance Lamp 20 Speaker 21 Image Display Device 22 Cross Keys (Cursor Keys)
23 menu button 24 effect button 26 game medal insertion slot 27 game medal selector 28 passage sensor 29 blocker 30 (30a, 30b) insertion sensor 32 operation switch 33 bet switch 33a 1 bet switch 33b 3 bet switch 34 start switch 35 stop switch 35a left Stop switch 35b Medium stop switch 35c Right stop switch 36 Settlement switch 38 Symbol display device 39 Reel 39a Left reel 39b Medium reel 39c Right reel 40 Motor 41 Reel sensor 43 Game medal display device 44 Display board 45 Storage number display LED
47 Acquisition number display LED
48 Status display LED
49 game medal payout device 50 hopper 51 hopper motor 52 (52a, 52b) payout sensor 53 payout outlet 54 connection parts 54a, 54b, 54c screw 60 main control board 61 input port 62 output port 63 RWM
64 ROM
65 Main CPU
66 Set value display LED
67 Management information display LED
69 role lottery means 70 reel control means 71 display determination means 72 payout means 75 RT control means 77 external signal transmission means 78 control command transmission means 80 sub control board 80A sub main control board 80B sub sub control board 81 (81A, 81B) input port 82 (82A, 82B) Output port 83 (83A, 83B) RWM
84 (84A, 84B) ROM
85 Sub CPU
85A Sub-main CPU
85B Sub-sub CPU
87 production control means 88 production management means 89 production execution means 100 external terminal board 200 hall computer

Claims (1)

A first storage area capable of storing a 1-byte value,
A second storage area capable of storing a 2-byte value,
When the first condition is satisfied, the first value can be stored in the first storage area,
When the second condition is satisfied, the second value can be stored in the second storage area,
A 1-byte timer area having a first storage area,
A 2-byte timer area having a second storage area,
The 1-byte timer area and the 2-byte timer area are configured to be adjacent to each other,
An update process capable of updating at least a value stored in the first storage area and a value stored in the second storage area in a predetermined cycle,
In the update processing, it is possible to execute a first special subtraction instruction that is one instruction and a second special subtraction instruction that is one instruction,
When updating the value stored in the first storage area, the first special subtraction instruction can be executed,
When updating the value stored in the second storage area, the second special subtraction instruction can be executed,
Making it possible to execute the first special subtraction instruction without determining whether the value stored in the first storage area is “0”,
When "N (where N is a value of 1 or more)" is stored in the first storage area, the value of the first storage area becomes "N-1" when the first special subtraction instruction is executed. ,
In a situation where "0" is stored in the first storage area, the value of the first storage area becomes "0" even if the first special subtraction instruction is executed,
The second special subtraction instruction can be executed without judging whether the value stored in the second storage area is "0",
When "M (where M is a value of 1 or more)" is stored in the second storage area, the value of the second storage area becomes "M-1" when the second special subtraction instruction is executed. ,
In a situation where “0” is stored in the second storage area, the value of the second storage area becomes “0” even if the second special subtraction instruction is executed.

Images